Close
Logo
About
FAQ
Home
Collections
Login
USC Login
Register
0
Selected 
Invert selection
Deselect all
Deselect all
 Click here to refresh results
 Click here to refresh results
USC
/
Digital Library
/
University of Southern California Dissertations and Theses
/
Merely verbal disputes in philosophy
(USC Thesis Other) 

Merely verbal disputes in philosophy

doctype icon
play button
PDF
 Download
 Share
 Open document
 Flip pages
 More
 Summarize
 Download a page range
 Download transcript
Contact Us
Contact Us
Copy asset link
Request this asset
Transcript (if available)
Content
  1
 

 

 

 

 

 
Luka
 Yovetich
 
Dissertation
 –
 MERELY
 VERBAL
 DISPUTES
 IN
 PHILOSOPHY
 
University
 of
 Southern
 California
 

 

 

 

 
A
 Dissertation
 Presented
 to
 the
 
FACULTY
 OF
 THE
 USC
 GRADUATE
 SCHOOL
 
UNIVERSITY
 OF
 SOUTHERN
 CALIFORNIA
 
In
 Partial
 Fulfillment
 of
 the
 
Requirements
 for
 the
 Degree
 
 
DOCTOR
 OF
 PHILOSOPHY
 
(PHILOSOPHY)
 
May
 2013
 

 

 
Copyright
 2013
   
   
   
   
   
   
  Luka
 Yovetich
 

  2
 
DEDICATION
 -­‐
 
This
 dissertation
 is
 dedicated
 to
 my
 mother,
 Diana,
 my
 father,
 Gene,
 and
 my
 
sister,
 Wallace.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  3
 
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
 –
 
This
 dissertation
 could
 not
 have
 been
 written
 without
 help.
 I
 am
 deeply
 grateful
 
to
 the
 philosophers
 on
 my
 final
 committee,
 James
 Van
 Cleve
 and
 Janet
 Levin,
 for
 
their
 willingness
 to
 work
 with
 me
 and
 help
 me
 get
 to
 the
 point
 of
 being
 able
 to
 
finish
 this
 project.
 Without
 their
 useful
 feedback
 and
 extraordinary
 patience
 this
 
dissertation
 would
 not
 have
 been
 completed.
 Their
 kindness
 and
 generosity
 is
 
greatly
 appreciated.
 I
 consider
 myself
 very
 lucky
 to
 have
 been
 able
 to
 work
 with
 
them.
 
 And
 thanks
 to
 Scott
 Paterson
 for
 serving
 as
 the
 external
 member
 on
 my
 
committee.
 
I
 would
 also
 like
 to
 thank
 Mark
 Schroeder
 for
 working
 with
 me
 during
 the
 
early
 and
 middle
 stages
 of
 this
 project.
 Mark
 is
 a
 caring
 graduate
 advisor
 and
 a
 
deeply
 committed
 professor.
 My
 conversations
 with
 him
 played
 an
 enormous
 
role
 in
 making
 this
 dissertation
 possible.
 I
 am
 thankful
 for
 his
 patience
 and
 his
 
willingness
 to
 talk
 with
 me
 whenever
 I
 was
 ready
 to
 make
 the
 next
 small
 step
 in
 
the
 dissertation
 writing
 process.
 
 
I
 would
 also
 like
 to
 thank
 Scott
 Soames
 for
 working
 with
 me
 in
 the
 earlier
 
stages
 of
 the
 project.
 The
 chapter
 on
 Carnap
 would
 not
 exist
 were
 it
 not
 for
 him.
 
 
It
 provides
 the
 main
 bit
 of
 historical
 context
 to
 the
 dissertation.
 
Thanks
 also
 are
 due
 to
 David
 Manley
 who
 helped
 me
 identify
 the
 topic
 as
 
one
 that
 I
 wanted
 to
 write
 about.
 I
 came
 into
 David’s
 office
 with
 a
 vague
 idea
 of
 
what
 I
 was
 interested
 in
 writing
 about
 and
 walked
 out
 with
 an
 actual
 topic.
 
Thanks
 also
 to
 Mark
 Balaguer
 for
 being
 so
 willing
 to
 talk
 with
 me
 about
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes
 and
 his
 views
 about
 them.
 Mark
 was
 my
 advisor
 at
 Cal
 

  4
 
State
 LA
 and
 a
 major
 influence
 in
 my
 philosophical
 development.
 His
 attraction
 to
 
deflationary
 views
 and
 his
 persuasive
 way
 of
 talking
 about
 them
 is
 part
 of
 what
 
drew
 me
 to
 my
 own
 view
 on
 this
 topic.
 
I
 would
 also
 like
 to
 thank
 my
 fellow
 grad
 students
 at
 USC
 for
 the
 many
 
discussions
 about
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 Mostly,
 I
 would
 like
 to
 thank
 Lewis
 
Powell,
 Sam
 Shpall,
 Nate
 Gadd,
 and
 Shyam
 Nair
 for
 providing
 me
 with
 useful
 
feedback
 at
 various
 points
 in
 the
 process
 of
 writing
 this
 dissertation.
 But
 I
 
benefited
 greatly
 from
 the
 grad
 students
 in
 general
 who
 were
 in
 the
 department
 
during
 my
 time
 there.
 
Finally,
 it
 should
 be
 made
 clear
 that
 the
 mistakes
 in
 this
 document
 are
 
mine.
 The
 things
 that
 are
 correct,
 insofar
 as
 there
 are
 any,
 would
 not
 be
 here
 
without
 those
 named
 above
 and
 others.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  5
 

 
TABLE
 OF
 CONTENTS
 –
 

 
DEDICATION
 
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 2
 

 
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 3
 

 
CHAPTER
 1
 
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 8
 

 
CHAPTER
 2
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 21
 

 
CHAPTER
 3
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 56
 

 
CHAPTER
 4
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 77
 

 
CHAPTER
 5
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 100
 

 
BIBLIOGRAPHY
   
   
   
   
   
   
  p.
 128
 

 

 

 

 

 

  6
 
ABSTRACT
 –
 

 
The
 purpose
 of
 my
 dissertation
 is
 to
 explore
 the
 nature
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 
in
 general
 and,
 more
 importantly,
 how
 they
 occur
 in
 philosophy.
 I
 will
 discuss
 the
 
general
 idea
 of
 what
 it
 means
 for
 a
 dispute
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 Intuitively,
 a
 
dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal
 when
 the
 disputants
 use
 some
 term
 or
 terms
 in
 their
 
dispute
 differently
 and
 the
 difference
 in
 usage
 is
 what
 accounts
 for
 the
 dispute.
 In
 
such
 a
 case,
 we
 often
 feel
 confortable
 saying
 that
 the
 disputants
 do
 not
 really
 
disagree.
 They
 only
 seem
 to
 disagree.
 
An
 easy
 illustrative
 example
 is
 one
 of
 two
 British
 and
 American
 children
 
involved
 in
 a
 dispute
 over
 whether
 a
 football
 is
 round
 or
 not.
 The
 Brit
 says
 that
 
footballs
 are
 round.
 The
 American
 says
 that
 they
 are
 not.
 But
 the
 Brit
 is
 talking
 
about
 soccer
 and
 the
 American
 is
 talking
 about
 American
 football.
 They
 just
 do
 
not
 realize
 that
 this
 is
 what
 is
 happening
 and,
 so,
 they
 take
 themselves
 to
 be
 
engaged
 in
 a
 substantive
 dispute.
 It
 seems
 to
 some
 philosophers
 (as
 well
 as
 
myself)
 that
 there
 are
 some
 philosophical
 disputes
 that
 are
 like
 this
 in
 a
 relevant
 
way.
 However,
 characterizing
 what
 it
 is
 for
 a
 dispute
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal
 is
 more
 
difficult
 than
 one
 might
 first
 assume.
 If
 some
 philosophical
 disputes
 are
 merely
 
verbal,
 then
 they
 are
 not
 as
 easy
 to
 spot
 as
 the
 dispute
 about
 football
 described
 
above.
 They
 are
 subtler,
 in
 some
 important
 way.
 Recently,
 some
 philosophers
 
have
 attempted
 to
 come
 up
 with
 characterizations
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 that
 
capture
 these
 less
 easy
 to
 identify
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 Part
 of
 this
 project
 
involves
 a
 discussion
 of
 current
 attempts
 (by
 Hirsch,
 Manley,
 Chalmers,
 and
 
others)
 in
 the
 literature
 to
 characterize
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 

  7
 
I
 then
 consider
 two
 fundamentally
 different
 sorts
 of
 philosophical
 
disputes,
 ontological
 and
 non-­‐ontological.
 Ontological
 disputes
 (disputes
 about
 
mereology,
 for
 instance)
 are
 commonly
 thought
 to
 be
 candidates
 for
 being
 merely
 
verbal.
 Many
 philosophers
 are
 doubtful
 of
 their
 status
 as
 substantive
 disputes.
 
Hirsch,
 in
 particular,
 argues
 for
 the
 conclusion
 that
 they
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 
consider
 arguments
 by
 Eklund
 and
 Balaguer
 against
 the
 Hirschian
 view.
 I
 
disagree
 with
 Eklund
 and
 come
 to
 a
 more
 mixed
 conclusion
 with
 respect
 to
 
Balaguer’s
 argument.
 
Lastly,
 while
 focusing
 on
 non-­‐ontological
 disputes,
 I
 identify
 what
 I
 call
 I-­‐
disputes
 and
 S-­‐disputes,
 focusing
 more
 heavily
 on
 the
 latter.
 I-­‐disputes
 involve
 
disputes
 over
 judgments
 of
 cases.
 S-­‐disputes
 involve
 disputes
 over
 necessary
 or
 
sufficient
 conditions
 for
 the
 proper
 application
 of
 some
 term.
 I
 conclude
 the
 
project
 by
 arguing
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  8
 
CHAPTER
 1
 –
 

   
   
   
  1.
 INTRODUCTION
 
In
 this
 project
 I
 will
 discuss
 the
 issue
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 I
 am
 going
 to
 
attempt
 to
 figure
 out
 what
 they
 are,
 and
 I
 am
 going
 to
 discuss
 the
 question
 of
 
whether
 any
 important
 philosophical
 disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 It
 has
 been
 
famously
 argued
 by
 Eli
 Hirsch
1

 that
 certain
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 merely
 
verbal.
 He
 is
 not
 alone
 in
 the
 philosophical
 community
 in
 suspecting
 that
 
ontological
 disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 will
 argue
 that
 Hirsch
 is
 wrong
 about
 
this
 and
 that
 such
 disputes
 are
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 However,
 I
 will
 also
 argue
 that
 
philosophical
 disputes
 of
 another
 kind
 are
 merely
 verbal—namely,
 conceptual
 
analysis
 disputes
 (for
 example:
 disputes
 over
 questions
 like
 ‘What
 is
 
knowledge?’,
 
 ‘What
 is
 free
 will?’,
 and
 so
 on).
 

  Let
 me
 quickly
 say
 what
 a
 merely
 verbal
 debate
 is.
 In
 chapter
 2,
 I
 will
 
discuss
 various
 views
 about
 what
 it
 is
 for
 a
 dispute
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal,
 but
 in
 the
 
meantime,
 it
 will
 be
 useful
 to
 have
 a
 working
 definition
 of
 ‘merely
 verbal
 dispute’.
 
The
 description
 ‘merely
 verbal’
 gives
 the
 reader
 a
 fairly
 good
 sense
 of
 what
 we
 
are
 talking
 about.
 As
 a
 gloss,
 let’s
 take
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 to
 be
 disputes
 in
 
which
 people
 are
 talking
 past
 each
 other
 and
 not
 actually
 disagreeing.
 More
 
specifically,
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 is
 one
 in
 which
 the
 disputants
 mean
 different
 
things
 by
 their
 words
 (in
 some
 sense
 of
 ‘mean’
 –
 I’ll
 discuss
 this
 in
 more
 detail
 in
 
chapter
 2)
 and
 this
 is
 what
 is
 generating
 the
 dispute.
 
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
1

 Hirsch
 (2011)
 

  9
 
Consider
 an
 obvious
 example
 of
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 Rebecca
 and
 
Jonas
 are
 arguing
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 there
 is
 a
 bank
 around
 the
 corner
 from
 
where
 they
 are
 standing.
 Rebecca
 means
 to
 be
 talking
 about
 a
 riverbank
 and
 
Jonas,
 unaware
 that
 there
 is
 even
 that
 sense
 of
 the
 term
 ‘bank’,
 means
 to
 be
 
talking
 about
 a
 financial
 institution.
 There
 is
 clearly
 a
 riverbank
 around
 the
 
corner
 from
 where
 they
 are
 standing,
 and
 Rebecca
 and
 Jonas
 both
 believe
 this.
 
There
 is
 clearly
 not
 a
 financial
 institution
 around
 the
 corner
 from
 where
 they
 are
 
standing,
 and
 once
 again,
 both
 Rebecca
 and
 Jonas
 believe
 this.
 Rebecca
 is
 correct
 
in
 her
 claim
 that
 there
 is
 a
 riverbank
 around
 the
 corner.
 Jonas
 is
 correct
 in
 his
 
claim
 that
 there
 is
 not
 a
 financial
 institution
 around
 the
 corner.
 The
 claims
 that
 
the
 two
 of
 them
 make
 are
 not
 contradictory,
 and
 in
 fact,
 they
 both
 are
 correct.
 
There
 is
 no
 real
 disagreement
 between
 Rebecca
 and
 Jonas,
 only
 an
 apparent
 
disagreement.
 
 

  This
 is
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 because
 there
 is
 an
 obvious
 sense
 in
 which
 
Rebecca
 and
 Jonas
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 their
 uses
 of
 the
 term
 ‘bank’
 and
 that
 
is
 what
 is
 causing
 them
 to
 engage
 in
 a
 dispute.
 

  It
 is
 important
 to
 avoid
 engaging
 in
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 insofar
 as
 we
 
can.
 Merely
 verbal
 disputes
 are
 seen
 as
 a
 waste
 of
 time.
 When
 people
 find
 out
 
that
 they
 have
 been
 engaged
 in
 one
 they
 tend
 to
 be
 motivated
 to
 drop
 the
 dispute
 
(unless
 they
 are
 irrationally
 attached
 to
 it
 for
 some
 reason).
 When
 we
 decide
 to
 
put
 time
 and
 energy
 into
 a
 dispute
 it
 is
 because
 we
 think
 that
 some
 sort
 of
 
progress
 is
 possible
 with
 respect
 to
 that
 dispute.
 We
 think
 that
 it
 is
 important
 to
 
either
 change
 the
 mind
 of
 the
 other
 disputant(s)
 or
 we
 think
 that
 it
 is
 important
 

  10
 
to
 give
 the
 other
 disputant(s)
 an
 opportunity
 to
 change
 our
 minds.
 But
 when
 we
 
find
 out
 that
 a
 dispute
 we’re
 engaged
 in
 is
 merely
 verbal,
 all
 of
 this
 falls
 away.
 
 In
 
short,
 it
 seems
 like
 a
 waste
 of
 time
 to
 engage
 in
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 
This
 brings
 up
 the
 question
 as
 to
 whether
 or
 not
 any
 philosophical
 
disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 If
 there
 are
 any
 philosophical
 disputes
 that
 are
 
merely
 verbal,
 it
 seems
 that
 philosophers
 should
 stop
 engaging
 in
 them.
 (This
 is
 
not
 to
 say
 that
 there
 is
 not
 a
 nearby
 dispute
 that
 such
 philosophers
 might
 be
 
justifiably
 motivated
 in
 taking
 up,
 just
 that
 the
 exact
 dispute
 that
 they
 were
 
focused
 on
 is
 not
 worthwhile
 -­‐
 according
 to
 their
 own
 judgment.)
 So
 it
 seems
 
important
 to
 determine
 whether
 any
 philosophical
 disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 
Insofar
 as
 philosophical
 progress
 is
 a
 goal
 of
 philosophers,
 and
 insofar
 as
 
engaging
 in
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 is
 contrary
 to
 that
 goal,
 philosophers
 should
 
be
 motivated
 to
 avoid
 engaging
 in
 them.
 
 And
 in
 fact,
 identifying
 a
 philosophical
 
dispute
 as
 merely
 verbal
 can
 be
 seen
 as
 a
 kind
 of
 philosophical
 progress
 in
 its
 
own
 right.
 
 For
 in
 doing
 this,
 we
 would
 be
 getting
 clearer
 about
 what
 we
 are
 
talking
 about
 in
 the
 relevant
 dispute.
 

  Let
 me
 give
 an
 example
 of
 what
 I
 am
 talking
 about.
 Consider
 a
 dispute
 
between
 mereological
 universalists
2

 and
 advocates
 of
 common
 sense
3
.
 
Mereological
 universalists
 think
 that
 for
 any
 two
 objects
 (for
 example,
 my
 
computer
 and
 my
 table),
 there
 is
 another
 object
 that
 is
 the
 mereological
 sum
 of
 
those
 two
 objects.
 Advocates
 of
 common
 sense,
 on
 the
 other
 hand,
 think
 that
 
there
 are
 just
 the
 two
 objects
 and
 no
 mereological
 sum.
 Hirsch
 thinks
 that
 this
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
2

 Van
 Cleve
 (1986)
 
3

 Hirsch
 (2011)
 

  11
 
dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 If
 this
 were
 right,
 then
 it
 would
 be
 important
 to
 stop
 
having
 this
 dispute.
 If
 each
 side
 is
 correct
 and
 neither
 side
 is
 wrong,
 then
 it
 seems
 
that
 progress
 on
 this
 dispute
 is
 impossible.
 And
 so
 there
 would
 be
 no
 point
 in
 
continuing
 the
 dispute.
 
2.
 SUMMARY
 OF
 PROJECT
 
I
 will
 now
 provide
 a
 quick
 summary
 of
 the
 entire
 project
 to
 give
 the
 reader
 a
 
sense
 of
 what
 is
 to
 come.
 Not
 counting
 this
 first
 chapter,
 there
 are
 four
 chapters
 
in
 the
 thesis.
 Let
 me
 start
 with
 chapter
 2.
 
 
The
 purpose
 of
 chapter
 2
 is
 to
 bring
 to
 the
 attention
 of
 the
 reader
 the
 kind
 
dispute
 that
 I’m
 calling
 merely
 verbal.
 
 In
 the
 first
 part
 of
 chapter
 2,
 I
 run
 through
 
four
 pairs
 of
 examples
 of
 disputes.
 In
 each
 pair,
 the
 two
 disputes
 will
 be
 on
 the
 
same
 general
 topic.
 But
 one
 of
 them
 will
 be
 a
 clearly
 substantive
 dispute,
 and
 the
 
other
 will
 be
 a
 dispute
 that
 is
 arguably
 merely
 verbal.
 In
 the
 first
 pair,
 the
 alleged
 
merely
 verbal
 dispute
 will
 be
 generated
 by
 the
 use
 of
 an
 ambiguous
 term;
 in
 the
 
second,
 it
 will
 be
 generated
 by
 the
 misuse
 of
 a
 name;
 in
 the
 third,
 the
 dispute
 will
 
involve
 a
 disagreement
 about
 how
 to
 use
 a
 certain
 ordinary-­‐language
 term;
 and
 
the
 fourth
 will
 be
 an
 instance
 of
 a
 seemingly
 intractable
 philosophical
 dispute,
 
namely,
 the
 dispute
 over
 the
 existence
 of
 mereological
 sums.
 In
 all
 but
 the
 first
 
case,
 the
 claim
 that
 the
 alleged
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 is
 indeed
 merely
 verbal
 is
 
controversial.
 And
 the
 degree
 of
 controversy
 goes
 up
 as
 we
 go
 through
 the
 list.
 In
 
the
 fourth
 case,
 the
 claim
 that
 it
 is
 merely
 verbal
 is
 extremely
 controversial,
 and,
 
in
 fact,
 I
 will
 end
 up
 endorsing
 the
 view
 that
 it
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 

  12
 
The
 purpose
 of
 this
 section
 is
 to
 draw
 out
 the
 similarity
 between
 the
 
alleged
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 The
 idea
 is
 that
 if
 the
 reader
 agrees
 that
 the
 first
 
alleged
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 is
 in
 fact
 merely
 verbal,
 then
 she
 will
 be
 more
 likely
 
to
 view
 the
 others
 as
 merely
 verbal
 as
 well.
 So,
 the
 goal
 is
 to
 make
 more
 plausible
 
the
 idea
 that
 certain
 seemingly
 substantive
 disputes
 of
 the
 kind
 that
 people
 really
 
engage
 in
 are
 actually
 merely
 verbal.
 
 
In
 the
 second
 part
 of
 chapter
 2,
 I
 will
 discuss
 some
 of
 the
 views
 in
 the
 
philosophical
 literature
 about
 what
 it
 takes
 for
 a
 dispute
 to
 count
 as
 merely
 
verbal.
 I
 will
 consider
 views
 from
 Ted
 Sider,
 David
 Chalmers,
 Carrie
 Jenkins,
 Eli
 
Hirsch,
 and
 David
 Manley.
4

 I
 will
 argue
 that
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 come
 up
 with
 the
 
best
 view
 (Manley’s
 view
 is
 merely
 a
 modification
 of
 Hirsch’s
 view).
 I
 will
 discuss
 
all
 of
 these
 views
 in
 detail
 in
 chapter
 2,
 but
 briefly,
 according
 to
 the
 Hirsch
 
Manley
 view,
 a
 dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal
 when
 the
 dispute
 is
 about
 the
 truth
 value
 
of
 a
 certain
 sentence
 ‘S’
 (person
 A
 asserts
 ‘S’,
 and
 person
 B
 asserts
 ‘not
 S’),
 and
 
the
 proposition
 that
 B
 expresses
 with
 ‘not
 S’
 does
 not
 contradict
 the
 proposition
 
that
 A
 expresses
 with
 ‘S’.
 This
 isn’t
 quite
 right,
 since
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 don’t
 
focus
 on
 the
 proposition
 expressed
 in
 the
 given
 public
 language;
 rather,
 they
 
focus
 on
 the
 proposition
 that
 is
 expressed
 in
 something
 like
 the
 private
 language
 
of
 the
 given
 disputant,
 although
 neither
 uses
 the
 term
 ‘private
 language’.
 
 More
 
specifically,
 Hirsch
 asks
 us
 to
 focus
 on
 propositions
 expressed
 in
 the
 language
 
that
 would
 be
 spoken
 by
 a
 community
 of
 people
 who
 were
 just
 like
 the
 speaker
 
with
 respect
 to
 their
 usage
 and
 dispositions
 to
 use
 terms.
 In
 Manley’s
 case,
 he
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
4

 See
 Sider
 (2004)
 and
 (2006),
 Chalmers
 (2011),
 Jenkins
 (forthcoming),
 Hirsch
 
(2011),
 and
 Manley
 (2009).
 

  13
 
asks
 us
 to
 focus
 on
 the
 proposition
 expressed
 by
 the
 sentence
 when
 the
 speaker
 
is
 treated
 as
 the
 semantic
 supervenience
 base
 of
 the
 relevant
 language.
 For
 my
 
purposes,
 the
 difference
 between
 the
 Hirsch
 view
 and
 the
 Manley
 view
 are
 not
 
important.
 So
 I
 end
 up
 endorsing
 what
 I
 call
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 view.
 In
 other
 
words,
 I
 endorse
 the
 parts
 of
 the
 two
 views
 that
 are
 the
 same,
 and
 where
 they
 are
 
different,
 I
 don’t
 take
 a
 stand
 on
 which
 one
 is
 correct.
 
In
 chapter
 3,
 I
 compare
 the
 views
 of
 Hirsch
 and
 Carnap.
 Hirsch
 is
 the
 
leading
 proponent
 of
 the
 view
 that
 various
 important
 philosophical
 disputes
 are
 
merely
 verbal,
 so
 in
 this
 historical
 chapter,
 it
 makes
 sense
 to
 concentrate
 on
 
Hirsch’s
 view.
 
 The
 purpose
 of
 this
 chapter
 is
 to
 give
 the
 contemporary
 view
 of
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes
 a
 historical
 context.
 I
 do
 that
 by
 comparing
 and
 
contrasting
 Hirsch’s
 view
 that
 certain
 philosophical
 disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal
 
with
 Carnap’s
 view
 that
 metaphysical
 disputes
 are
 pseudo-­‐disputes.
 Some
 people
 
think
 that
 the
 views
 are
 similar,
 and
 they
 are
 in
 certain
 ways.
 One
 way
 to
 
interpret
 Hirsch
 is
 as
 saying
 that
 certain
 metaphysical
 disputes
 are
 pseudo-­‐
disputes.
 So
 obviously,
 there
 are
 deep
 similarities
 between
 the
 two
 views.
 
However,
 after
 clearly
 laying
 out
 the
 two
 views,
 I
 argue
 that
 there
 are
 important
 
differences.
 For
 example,
 Hirsch
 doesn’t
 think
 that
 all
 metaphysical
 disputes
 are
 
merely
 verbal;
 he
 just
 thinks
 some
 of
 them
 are.
 
 Another
 difference
 is
 that
 Hirsch
 
thinks
 there
 can
 be
 a
 correct
 answer
 to
 the
 questions
 around
 which
 these
 
disputes
 revolve.
 These
 answers
 are
 determined
 by
 facts
 about
 the
 public
 
language
 in
 which
 the
 participants
 in
 the
 dispute
 are
 speaking.
 In
 contrast,
 
Carnap’s
 pseudo-­‐disputes
 involve
 meaningless
 questions
 with
 no
 real
 answers.
 

  14
 
Chapter
 4
 focuses
 on
 ontological
 disputes
 and
 the
 issue
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 
they
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 The
 main
 example
 I
 use
 is
 a
 version
 of
 the
 dispute
 about
 
material
 constitution
 (in
 other
 words,
 the
 dispute
 between
 one-­‐thingers
 and
 two-­‐
thingers).
 I
 also
 discuss
 the
 dispute
 between
 presentists
 and
 eternalists
 over
 the
 
existence
 of
 non-­‐present
 objects.
 But
 the
 discussion
 is
 meant
 to
 apply
 to
 
ontological
 disputes
 in
 general.
 

 I
 start
 by
 rehearsing
 Hirsch’s
 argument
 for
 the
 claim
 that
 ontological
 
disputes
 like
 the
 above
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 Briefly,
 Hirsch’s
 argument
 is
 that
 the
 
participants
 in
 onotological
 disputes
 are
 speaking
 different
 languages,
 and
 their
 
sentences
 come
 out
 true
 in
 their
 own
 languages,
 and
 they
 are
 not
 really
 
disagreeing
 about
 any
 factual
 claims.
 
But
 most
 of
 the
 chapter
 is
 concerned
 with
 discussing
 attacks
 on
 Hirsch’s
 
mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes.
 I
 discuss
 three
 arguments
 here.
 The
 
first
 two
 are
 given
 by
 Matti
 Eklund,
 and
 the
 third
 one
 is
 given
 by
 Mark
 Balaguer.
 
Let
 me
 start
 with
 the
 two
 Eklund
 arguments.
 He
 calls
 these
 arguments
 the
 
semantic
 argument
 and
 the
 propositional
 argument.
 But
 for
 our
 purposes
 here,
 
these
 two
 arguments
 are
 similar
 enough
 that
 they
 can
 be
 treated
 together.
 The
 
basic
 idea
 is
 as
 follows.
 
 Assume
 that
 Hirsch’s
 analysis
 of
 the
 participants
 in
 
ontological
 disputes
 is
 right.
 In
 other
 words,
 assume
 that
 each
 participant
 speaks
 
her
 own
 language;
 the
 participant
 with
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontology
 speaks
 a
 
language
 in
 which
 sentence
 asserting
 the
 truth
 of
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontology
 are
 
actually
 true;
 and
 the
 participant
 with
 the
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 speaks
 a
 
language
 in
 which
 sentence
 asserting
 the
 truth
 of
 the
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 are
 

  15
 
actually
 true.
 But
 if
 this
 view
 of
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontologist
 is
 correct—in
 other
 
words,
 if
 the
 sentences
 of
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontologist
 are
 true
 in
 her
 own
 
language—then
 the
 objects
 that
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontologist
 believes
 in
 must
 
exist.
 But
 then
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontology
 is
 correct.
 So
 Eklund’s
 argument
 is
 
that
 if
 Hirsch’s
 analysis
 of
 the
 situation
 is
 correct,
 then
 the
 right
 conclusion
 isn’t
 
mere
 verbalism;
 rather,
 it’s
 that
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontology
 is
 the
 right
 ontology.
 
After
 laying
 out
 Eklund’s
 two
 arguments,
 I
 give
 Hirsch’s
 response.
 I
 argue
 
that
 his
 response
 is
 unsatisfactory
 and
 that
 Eklund’s
 argument
 successfully
 
refutes
 Hirsch’s
 particular
 version
 of
 mere
 verbalism.
 But
 I
 also
 argue
 that
 mere
 
verbalists
 can
 endorse
 a
 different
 view
 (distinct
 from
 Hirsch’s
 version
 of
 mere
 
verbalism)
 and
 that
 if
 they
 do
 this,
 they
 can
 successfully
 respond
 to
 Eklund’s
 
argument.
 
In
 the
 next
 section
 of
 the
 chapter,
 I
 discuss
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 against
 
the
 view
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 Balaguer
 introduces
 a
 
matrix
 of
 types
 of
 views
 in
 order
 to
 more
 clearly
 assess
 the
 issue.
 Roughly
 
speaking,
 the
 matrix
 includes
 four
 different
 types
 of
 view
 that
 vary
 along
 two
 
dimensions,
 semantics
 and
 ontology.
 More
 specifically,
 he
 argues
 that
 in
 any
 
given
 ontological
 debate,
 theorists
 can
 endorse
 either
 a
 more
 inclusive
 or
 a
 less
 
inclusive
 ontology;
 and
 they
 can
 endorse
 either
 a
 thick
 or
 a
 thin
 semantics.
 A
 
thick
 semantics
 is
 one
 that
 holds
 that
 in
 order
 for
 the
 relevant
 sentences
 to
 be
 
true,
 the
 more
 inclusive
 ontology
 must
 be
 true;
 and
 a
 thin
 semantics
 is
 one
 that
 
holds
 that
 in
 order
 for
 the
 relevant
 sentences
 to
 be
 true,
 the
 more
 inclusive
 
ontology
 doesn’t
 need
 to
 be
 true.
 Balaguer
 then
 argues
 that
 for
 any
 ontological
 

  16
 
dispute,
 there
 is
 a
 substantive
 version
 of
 the
 dispute
 and
 a
 merely
 verbal
 version
 
of
 the
 dispute.
 In
 the
 merely
 verbal
 version
 of
 the
 dispute,
 the
 person
 who
 
endorses
 the
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 and
 the
 thick
 semantics
 is
 having
 a
 dispute
 
with
 the
 person
 who
 endorses
 the
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 and
 the
 thin
 semantics.
 
And
 in
 the
 substantive
 version
 of
 the
 dispute,
 the
 person
 who
 endorses
 the
 more
 
inclusive
 ontology
 and
 the
 thick
 semantics
 is
 having
 a
 dispute
 with
 the
 person
 
who
 endorses
 the
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 and
 the
 thick
 semantics.
 So
 while
 any
 
given
 ontological
 dispute
 between
 two
 actual
 philosophers
 could
 end
 up
 being
 
merely
 verbal,
 there
 is
 always
 a
 substantive
 dispute
 to
 be
 had
 about
 the
 given
 
issue.
 So
 strong
 versions
 of
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 false.
 
(By
 a
 strong
 version
 of
 mere
 verbalism,
 I
 mean
 the
 view
 that
 there
 is
 no
 
substantive
 dispute
 to
 be
 had
 about
 the
 given
 issue.)
 
I
 find
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 convincing,
 and
 so
 I
 conclude
 that
 strong
 mere
 
verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 is
 false.
 
The
 main
 focus
 of
 chapter
 5
 is
 my
 argument
 for
 the
 view
 that
 
philosophical
 disputes
 of
 a
 certain
 kind
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 start
 off
 by
 making
 a
 
distinction
 between
 what
 I
 call
 I-­‐disputes
 and
 S-­‐disputes.
 Briefly,
 an
 I-­‐dispute
 is
 a
 
dispute
 over
 a
 case
 that
 is
 generated
 by
 a
 difference
 in
 intuition
 about
 whether
 
some
 term
 applies
 to
 a
 given
 object.
 An
 example
 of
 an
 I-­‐dispute
 might
 be
 as
 
follows.
 Jack
 and
 Alice
 disagree
 over
 a
 philosophical
 case
 they
 are
 considering.
 
The
 case
 is
 a
 Gettier
 case
 in
 which
 an
 agent,
 Ralph,
 has
 some
 justified
 true
 belief
 
that
 to
 many
 does
 not
 seem
 like
 knowledge.
 Jack
 agrees
 that
 Ralph
 does
 not
 have
 
knowledge.
 Alice
 thinks
 Ralph
 does
 have
 knowledge.
 This
 is
 an
 I-­‐dispute.
 

  17
 
An
 S-­‐dispute,
 on
 the
 other
 hand,
 is
 just
 an
 ordinary
 conceptual
 analysis
 
dispute.
 In
 other
 words,
 it
 is
 a
 dispute
 that
 involves
 an
 analysis,
 or
 partial
 
analysis,
 of
 some
 term
 or
 concept.
 For
 example,
 if
 Jack
 and
 Alice
 are
 arguing
 
about
 what
 knowledge
 is—for
 example,
 if
 Alice
 thinks
 that
 justified
 true
 belief
 is
 
sufficient
 for
 knowledge,
 and
 Jack
 thinks
 that
 justified
 true
 belief
 is
 not
 sufficient
 
for
 knowledge—then
 they
 are
 having
 an
 S-­‐dispute.
 
I
 argue
 in
 chapter
 5
 that
 philosophical
 I-­‐disputes
 of
 a
 certain
 kind
 are
 
merely
 verbal.
 Roughly,
 the
 I-­‐disputes
 in
 question
 are
 those
 that
 I
 just
 mentioned
 
in
 discussing
 Balaguer’s
 matrix.
 More
 specifically,
 consider
 a
 debate
 between
 a
 
person
 who
 endorses
 a
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 and
 thick
 semantics
 and
 a
 person
 
who
 endorse
 a
 less
 inclusive
 ontology
 and
 a
 thin
 semantics.
 If
 these
 two
 people
 
get
 into
 a
 dispute
 about
 whether
 some
 object
 has
 the
 relevant
 trait,
 it
 will
 be
 a
 
merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 For
 example,
 consider
 a
 dispute
 between
 a
 Humean
 
compatibilist
 about
 free
 will
 and
 a
 hard
 determinist.
 The
 compatibilist
 says
 that
 
free
 will
 and
 determinism
 are
 compatible.
 And
 the
 hard
 determinist
 says
 that
 
they
 are
 not
 and
 that
 determinism
 is
 true.
 If
 they
 get
 into
 a
 dispute
 about
 whether
 
some
 deterministic
 agent
 (who
 is
 clearly
 free
 in
 Hume’s
 sense)
 has
 free
 will,
 the
 
dispute
 will
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 
So
 one
 conclusion
 of
 chapter
 5
 is
 that
 I-­‐disputes
 like
 this
 are
 merely
 
verbal.
 But
 the
 much
 more
 important
 claim
 that
 I
 argue
 for
 in
 chapter
 5
 is
 that
 S-­‐
disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 give
 multiple
 arguments
 for
 this
 conclusion.
 But
 the
 
general
 idea
 is
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 approximate
 arguments
 about
 semantics,
 given
 
fundamentally
 different
 ways
 that
 the
 disputants
 use
 the
 relevant
 terms.
 I
 

  18
 
contend
 that
 in
 most
 philosophical
 settings
 in
 which
 people
 are
 having
 S-­‐
disputes,
 the
 disputants
 do
 not
 take
 themselves
 to
 just
 be
 doing
 semantics.
 So
 in
 
these
 cases,
 they
 end
 up
 using
 the
 terms
 in
 fundamentally
 different
 ways,
 while
 
doing
 conceptual
 analysis.
 And
 because
 of
 this,
 I
 argue,
 the
 disputes
 are
 merely
 
verbal
 
3.
 EXTERNALISTIC
 ASSUMPTIONS
 
Before
 concluding
 this
 chapter,
 I
 want
 to
 make
 clear
 an
 assumption,
 or
 a
 set
 of
 
assumptions,
 that
 I
 will
 be
 making.
 I
 will
 be
 making
 them
 because
 it
 seems
 that
 
insofar
 as
 an
 account
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 is
 consistent
 with
 them,
 it
 will
 be
 
less
 vulnerable
 to
 attack.
 These
 assumptions
 are
 relevant
 to
 the
 whole
 project,
 
but
 they
 are
 most
 important
 to
 chapter
 2.
 The
 assumptions
 are
 externalistic
 
assumptions,
 and
 they
 have
 to
 do
 with
 certain
 semantic
 facts.
 A
 large
 portion
 of
 
the
 philosophical
 community
 thinks
 they
 are
 true
 or
 is
 sympathetic
 to
 them.
 
Moreover,
 insofar
 as
 a
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 is
 consistent
 
with
 the
 externalistic
 assumptions,
 they
 will
 also
 be
 consistent
 with
 internalistic
 
assumptions.
 At
 any
 rate,
 the
 basic
 assumption
 is
 that
 the
 semantic
 content
 of
 
terms
 and
 sentences
 in
 some
 language
 is
 at
 least
 partially
 determined
 by
 factors
 
other
 than
 the
 usage
 and
 intentions
 of
 the
 speakers
 in
 the
 linguistic
 community.
 
This
 view
 can
 be
 motivated
 by
 considering
 Putnam’s
 Twin
 Earth
 scenario
5

 in
 
which
 two
 planets,
 Earth
 and
 Twin
 Earth,
 are
 superficially
 identical
 except
 for
 the
 
microscopic
 nature
 of
 the
 liquid
 that
 makes
 up
 rivers,
 oceans,
 etc.
 On
 Earth
 this
 
liquid
 is
 H20
 and
 on
 Twin
 Earth
 it
 is
 XYZ.
 But
 in
 both
 places
 the
 term
 ‘water’
 is
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
5

 Putnam
 (1973)
 

  19
 
used
 to
 pick
 the
 stuff
 out.
 Given
 the
 common
 non-­‐descriptivist
 assumption
 that
 
the
 semantic
 content
 of
 the
 term
 ‘water’
 (that
 which
 the
 term
 contributes
 to
 
propositions
 expressed
 by
 sentences
 to
 which
 it
 belongs)
 is
 its
 molecular
 
makeup,
 the
 term
 ‘water’
 has
 different
 semantic
 content
 in
 the
 different
 places.
 
But
 the
 people
 who
 live
 on
 each
 of
 these
 planets
 have
 the
 same
 
phenomenological
 experience
 of
 their
 home
 and
 what
 they
 call
 ‘water’
 as
 the
 
people
 who
 live
 on
 the
 other
 planet,
 even
 though
 they
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 
the
 term.
 

  Social
 factors
 can
 also
 have
 a
 similar
 effect
 on
 the
 relationship
 between
 an
 
individual
 speaker
 and
 the
 meaning
 of
 terms
 in
 her
 language.
 For
 instance,
 the
 
term
 ‘lion’
 refers
 to
 the
 animal
 that
 English
 speakers
 use
 it
 to
 refer
 to.
 Lions
 are
 in
 
the
 cat
 family
 and
 they
 have
 manes
 and
 are
 known
 as
 the
 king
 of
 the
 jungle.
 But
 
we
 can
 imagine
 a
 person
 who
 mislearned
 the
 term
 ‘lion’
 and
 actually
 uses
 it
 to
 
refer
 to
 tigers.
 It
 seems
 fairly
 easy
 to
 generate
 the
 intuition
 that
 the
 person
 who
 
uses
 the
 sentence
 ‘lions
 do
 not
 have
 manes’
 to
 speak
 about
 tigers
 is
 unsuccessfully
 
trying
 to
 speak
 about
 tigers.
 In
 fact,
 such
 a
 speaker
 is
 only
 succeeding
 at
 making
 a
 
false
 claim
 about
 lions,
 given
 what
 the
 sentence
 means
 in
 the
 language
 of
 the
 
community.
 

  These
 assumptions,
 that
 a
 speaker’s
 environment
 (social
 and
 non-­‐social)
 
can
 affect
 the
 meanings
 of
 the
 terms
 that
 the
 speaker
 utters
 are,
 again,
 popular
 to
 
some
 degree
 or
 another.
 This
 means
 that
 any
 theory
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 
that
 is
 not
 consistent
 with
 them
 might
 be
 vulnerable
 to
 attack
 from
 externalists.
 
Internalists
 can
 more
 easily
 allow
 for
 speakers
 to
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 

  20
 
disputes
 sentences,
 since
 they
 do
 not
 take
 environment
 (social
 and
 non-­‐social)
 to
 
be
 as
 determining
 of
 the
 meaning
 of
 terms
 as
 externalists.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  21
 
CHAPTER
 2
 –
 
1.
 INTRODUCTION
 
The
 focus
 of
 this
 chapter
 is
 characterizations
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 that
 have
 
been
 offered
 recently
 by
 philosophers.
 I
 will
 discuss
 them
 and
 see
 which
 one(s)
 
are
 best,
 given
 certain
 externalist
 views
 about
 semantics
 that
 I
 would
 like
 to
 
assume.
 I
 will
 consider
 two
 groups
 of
 views.
 The
 first
 group
 has
 views
 (those
 of
 
David
 Chalmers,
 Carrie
 Jenkins,
 and
 Ted
 Sider)
 that
 do
 not
 take
 a
 sufficiently
 
externalistic
 view
 of
 the
 semantic
 content
 or
 belief
 content.
 The
 second
 group,
 
the
 views
 of
 Eli
 Hirsch
 and
 David
 Manley
 are
 those
 that
 I
 consider
 to
 be
 closest
 to
 
optimally
 consistent
 with
 the
 view
 that
 factors
 external
 to
 the
 speaker
 can
 have
 
great
 influence
 on
 what
 he
 says
 and,
 so,
 what
 he
 thinks.
 The
 latter
 pair
 of
 views
 is
 
quite
 similar
 and
 will
 contrast
 most
 noticeably
 with
 that
 of
 Sider.
 Hirsch
 and
 
Sider
 have
 something
 of
 a
 discussion
 going
 in
 the
 literature
 about
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes
 in
 metaphysics.
 It
 is
 useful,
 I
 think,
 to
 focus
 on
 their
 responses
 to
 each
 
other
 and
 what
 the
 state
 of
 the
 discussion
 is
 at
 this
 point.
 I
 am
 including
 Manley’s
 
view
 with
 Hirsch’s
 because
 I
 believe
 it
 is
 a
 modification
 of
 Hirsch’s
 view
 that
 is
 an
 
improvement,
 and
 it
 gets
 us
 closer
 to
 the
 right
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes.
 Finally,
 I
 will
 suggest
 a
 modification
 of
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 style
 view
 
that,
 I
 believe,
 allows
 it
 to
 avoid
 Sider’s
 main
 objection.
 
2.
 PAIRS
 OF
 SUBSTANTIVE
 AND
 (POSSIBLE)
 MERELY
 VERBAL
 DISPUTES
 
To
 get
 the
 reader
 in
 the
 right
 frame
 of
 mind,
 I
 would
 like
 to
 consider
 four
 pairs
 of
 
examples
 before
 discussing
 the
 views
 mentioned
 above.
 There
 is
 an
 intuitive
 
difference
 between
 the
 members
 of
 each
 pair.
 I
 begin
 with
 a
 pair
 of
 cases
 that
 are
 

  22
 
clearly
 and
 obviously
 different.
 And
 I
 work
 my
 way
 down
 to
 cases
 that
 I
 believe
 
to
 be
 clearly
 different,
 yet
 a
 bit
 subtler.
 What
 makes
 a
 case
 subtler
 is
 that
 it
 is
 
more
 difficult
 to
 detect
 and
 more
 difficult
 to
 articulate
 exactly
 how
 it
 qualifies
 as
 
a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 (even
 though
 there
 is,
 I
 believe,
 an
 intuitional
 pull
 
towards
 classifying
 them
 as
 such).
 The
 thing
 for
 the
 reader
 to
 keep
 an
 eye
 on
 is
 
the
 intuitive
 similarity
 between
 the
 first
 three
 pairs.
 There
 is
 a
 relationship
 
between
 the
 members
 of
 each
 pair
 that
 is
 the
 same
 in
 kind.
 I
 leave
 open
 the
 
question
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 fourth
 pair
 shares
 this
 relation.
 As
 far
 as
 
philosophical
 disputes
 go,
 it
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 good
 candidate
 for
 being
 classified
 as
 a
 
merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 This
 is
 not
 to
 say
 that
 it
 is
 one,
 but
 only
 that
 it
 is
 the
 type
 
of
 philosophical
 dispute
 that
 warrants
 a
 closer
 look.
 
A1:
 
Consider
 the
 following
 conversation
 between
 a
 British
 person
 and
 an
 American.
 
Assume
 that
 each
 has
 knowledge
 of
 the
 ambiguity
 of
 the
 term
 ‘football’.
 Their
 
dispute
 is
 substantive
 and
 not
 generated
 by
 some
 fundamental
 difference
 in
 the
 
way
 they
 use
 their
 terms:
 
Briton:
 Football,
 or
 soccer
 (as
 you
 guys
 call
 it),
 is
 the
 greatest
 sport
 in
 the
 
world!
 
American:
 No,
 it
 isn’t.
 American
 football
 is.
 
Briton:
 That’s
 ridiculous.
 There’s
 no
 real
 grace
 to
 it.
 It’s
 for
 meatheads.
 
American:
 It
 might
 be
 for
 meatheads,
 but
 it’s
 better
 than
 soccer.
 

 

 

  23
 
A2:
 
Now,
 consider
 the
 next
 example.
 This
 is
 one
 in
 which
 a
 Briton
 and
 an
 American
 
do
 not
 have
 knowledge
 of
 the
 fact
 that
 ‘football’
 is
 an
 ambiguous
 term.
 In
 it,
 it
 
seems
 clear
 that
 the
 difference
 in
 the
 way
 they
 are
 using
 the
 term
 ‘football’
 is
 
generating
 the
 dispute:
 
Briton:
 
 Football
 is
 the
 most
 brilliant
 sport
 in
 the
 world.
 Just
 the
 best!
 
American:
 Ugh…
 I
 hate
 football.
 It’s
 SO
 violent.
 And
 they’re
 ALWAYS
 
stopping
 play…
 
Briton:
 What
 are
 you
 talking
 about?
 Football
 is
 a
 graceful
 sport
 with
 very
 
little
 violence.
 And
 play
 is
 practically
 continuous.
 
American:
 You’re
 joking,
 right?
 Why
 do
 you
 think
 they
 wear
 all
 of
 those
 
pads,
 and
 the
 helmets,
 in
 football?
 It’s
 for
 protection
 from
 the
 violent
 
nature
 of
 the
 sport.
 And
 they
 stop
 play
 constantly
 to
 reset
 the
 ball.
 
Briton:
 I
 literally
 do
 not
 know
 what
 you’re
 talking
 about.
 Football
 is
 
nothing
 like
 that…
 
Obviously,
 the
 Briton
 is
 using
 the
 term
 ‘football’
 to
 talk
 about
 soccer.
 And
 the
 
American
 is
 using
 the
 term
 to
 talk
 about
 American
 football.
 Let’s
 also
 assume
 that
 
the
 American
 believes
 that
 soccer
 is
 the
 best
 sport
 in
 the
 world.
 If
 such
 were
 the
 
case,
 a
 correct
 thing
 to
 say
 about
 this
 conversation
 would
 be
 that
 the
 two
 
disputants
 actually
 agree
 about
 the
 truth
 of
 the
 relevant
 claim,
 that
 soccer
 is
 the
 
best
 sport
 in
 the
 world.
 This
 case
 is,
 without
 controversy,
 merely
 verbal.
 This
 is
 a
 
paradigmatic
 case
 of
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 I
 take
 the
 relationship
 between
 

  24
 
these
 two
 examples
 to
 be
 intuitively
 similar
 to
 the
 relationship
 between
 the
 pairs
 
below.
 
B1:
 
It
 seems,
 though,
 that
 we
 do
 not
 need
 ambiguity
 of
 some
 term
 of
 the
 dispute
 to
 
get
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 (or,
 at
 least,
 something
 importantly
 like
 one).
 Let
 us
 
look
 at
 a
 pair
 of
 examples
 with
 no
 ambiguous
 terms
 generating
 either
 dispute.
 
This
 pair
 will
 be
 analogous
 to
 the
 previous
 pair
 in
 that
 the
 first
 will
 be
 obviously
 
substantive
 and
 the
 second
 will
 not.
 
Imagine
 two
 friends,
 Jim
 and
 John,
 arguing
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 actor
 
Steve
 Carrell
 is
 in
 the
 movie
 Bruce
 Almighty.
 Assume
 that
 each
 has
 the
 right
 
person
 in
 mind
 when
 using
 the
 proper
 names
 in
 the
 dispute:
 
Jim:
 You
 remember
 Steve
 Carrell
 in
 Bruce
 Almighty?
 That
 was
 before
 he
 
became
 famous.
 
John:
 I
 don’t
 think
 he
 was
 in
 that.
 That
 was
 Jim
 Carrey.
 
Jim:
 Yeah,
 Jim
 Carrey
 was
 in
 that
 movie,
 too.
 He
 was
 the
 lead.
 Carrell
 was
 
the
 guy
 he
 was
 competing
 with
 for
 the
 anchor
 job.
 
John:
 No,
 he
 wasn’t.
 I
 would
 remember
 that.
 I
 love
 Steve
 Carrell.
 It
 must’ve
 
been
 someone
 else.
 
B2:
 
Now,
 consider
 the
 following
 conversation
 between
 Jim
 and
 John
 discussing
 a
 
movie.
 It
 seems
 as
 though
 there
 is
 something
 non-­‐substantive
 about
 this
 dispute,
 
even
 if
 Jim
 and
 John
 are
 making
 contradictory
 claims
 and
 have
 contradictory
 
beliefs:
 

  25
 
Jim:
 Man,
 I
 can’t
 wait
 to
 see
 Steve
 Carrell
 in
 his
 new
 movie,
 Land
 of
 the
 
Lost!
 
John:
 That’s
 not
 a
 Steve
 Carrell
 movie,
 dude…
 
Jim:
 What
 are
 you
 talking
 about,
 of
 course
 it
 is.
 The
 tall
 comedian
 guy
 with
 
the
 curly
 hair,
 who
 used
 to
 be
 on
 SNL.
 He’s
 in
 Land
 of
 the
 Lost.
 
John:
 No,
 that’s
 not
 Steve
 Carrell.
 That’s
 Will
 Farrell.
 Steve
 Carrell
 is
 short
 
and
 is
 on
 The
 Office.
 
Jim:
 Oh
 yeah…
 Right…
 I
 meant
 him.
 
The
 brief
 dispute
 above,
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 Steve
 Carell
 is
 in
 Land
 of
 the
 Lost,
 is
 
a
 merely
 verbal
 one.
 Assuming
 that
 Jim
 is
 competent
 with
 the
 name
 ‘Steve
 
Carrell’,
 he
 makes
 a
 claim
 about
 Carrell
 at
 the
 top
 of
 the
 conversation,
 that
 he
 
(Jim)
 cannot
 wait
 to
 see
 that
 new
 Steve
 Carrell
 movie.
 He
 goes
 on
 to
 disagree
 with
 
John
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 Land
 of
 the
 Lost
 is
 a
 Steve
 Carrell
 film.
 I
 would
 like
 to
 
draw
 the
 focus
 of
 the
 reader
 to
 the
 similarity
 between
 this
 pair
 and
 the
 first
 pair,
 
involving
 the
 term
 ‘football’.
 There
 seems
 to
 be
 something
 non-­‐substantive
 about
 
the
 second
 half
 of
 this
 pair
 that
 is
 very
 much
 like
 what
 seems
 to
 be
 happening
 
when
 the
 Briton
 and
 the
 American
 are
 talking
 past
 each
 other
 when
 they
 use
 the
 
term
 ‘football’
 differently.
 With
 this
 pair
 of
 cases,
 we
 can
 see
 that
 what
 I
 am
 
calling
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 (which
 might
 include
 some
 examples
 that
 fall
 
outside
 of
 our
 ordinary
 notion)
 can
 occur
 even
 in
 cases
 in
 which
 the
 speakers
 
really
 do
 say
 contradictory
 things.
 We
 can
 find
 examples
 of
 this
 that
 do
 not
 rely
 
on
 a
 speaker
 misusing
 a
 proper
 name,
 as
 well.
 

 

  26
 
C1:
 
Imagine
 a
 husband
 and
 wife
 arguing
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 their
 kid’s
 Lakers
 cup
 
is
 in
 the
 car.
 It
 is
 a
 substantive
 dispute.
 There
 is
 no
 term
 of
 the
 dispute
 that
 Jenny
 
is
 using
 in
 a
 fundamentally
 different
 way
 than
 Jackson,
 and
 vice
 versa:
 
Jenny:
 The
 cup
 is
 in
 the
 car.
 
Jackson:
 No
 it’s
 not.
 I
 already
 looked
 there.
 
Jenny:
 I
 know
 you,
 and
 I
 know
 that
 you
 didn’t
 look
 hard
 enough…It’s
 
under
 the
 front
 passenger
 seat.
 
Jackson:
 Ugh.
 No,
 it
 isn’t.
 I’m
 telling
 you.
 I
 looked.
 
C2:
 
Now
 imagine
 the
 same
 couple
 arguing
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 some
 drinking
 vessel
 
is
 a
 cup.
 The
 dispute
 is
 generated
 by
 some
 fundamental
 difference
 with
 respect
 to
 
how
 each
 speaker
 uses
 the
 term
 ‘cup’:
 
 
Jenny:
 Hand
 me
 that
 cup
 over
 there,
 please.
 I
 need
 some
 water.
 
Jackson:
 Um…
 I’ll
 hand
 you
 that
 glass,
 if
 that’s
 what
 you’re
 asking
 for…
 
Jenny:
 Yeah,
 hand
 me
 that
 glass
 cup.
 
Jackson:
 Look,
 no
 big
 deal…
 But
 it’s
 a
 glass,
 not
 a
 cup.
 Cups
 aren’t
 made
 of
 
glass.
 Here
 you
 go.
 
Jenny:
 Thanks.
 And,
 I
 think
 you’re
 wrong.
 Some
 cups
 are
 made
 of
 glass.
 
This
 one
 is.
 
Jackson:
 Sweetheart…
 I
 love
 you.
 You
 know
 that.
 So
 don’t
 take
 this
 the
 
wrong
 way.
 But
 cups
 can’t
 be
 made
 of
 glass.
 It
 just
 doesn’t
 work
 that
 way.
 

  27
 
Jenny:
 Sugarpie…
 I
 love
 you,
 too.
 But
 you’re
 wrong.
 This
 is
 a
 cup.
 And
 it’s
 
made
 of
 glass…
 
This,
 to
 me,
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 But
 if
 the
 reader
 has
 some
 
intuitive
 ordinary
 notion
 of
 what
 it
 takes
 for
 a
 dispute
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal
 that
 
does
 not
 apply
 to
 this
 case,
 then
 he
 should
 consider
 me
 as
 asking
 him
 to
 extend
 
that
 notion
 past
 its
 ordinary
 usage.
 It
 is
 not
 important
 to
 me
 here
 what
 the
 term
 
‘merely
 verbal
 dispute’
 means
 in
 our
 language.
 It
 is
 important
 to
 me
 that
 there
 
seems
 to
 be
 something
 quite
 similar
 going
 on
 between
 A1-­‐A2
 and
 C1-­‐C2
 that
 
seems
 related
 to
 what
 makes
 the
 former
 pair
 an
 uncontroversial
 example
 of
 an
 
ordinary
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 
An
 important
 difference
 between
 the
 first
 merely
 verbal
 case
 and
 this
 one
 
is
 that
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 does
 not
 seem
 to
 be
 ambiguous,
 whereas
 the
 term
 ‘football’
 
is.
 Intuitively,
 there
 is
 one
 (relevant)
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
6
.
 And,
 so,
 it
 seems
 
as
 though
 there
 is
 an
 important
 sense
 in
 which
 only
 one
 of
 the
 parties
 to
 the
 
second
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 can
 be
 correct.
 It
 is
 a
 reasonable
 assumption
 that
 it
 
is
 either
 true
 that
 a
 cup
 can
 be
 made
 of
 glass
 or
 it
 is
 not
 true.
 This
 contrasts
 with
 
the
 case
 involving
 the
 term
 ‘football’
 (A2),
 in
 which
 both
 sides
 can
 be
 correct.
 In
 
the
 ‘cup’
 case
 (C2),
 either
 Jenny
 is
 correct
 or
 Jackson
 is,
 but
 not
 both.
 They
 make
 
claims
 that
 contradict
 one
 another.
 In
 the
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 involving
 the
 
term
 ‘football’
 the
 Briton
 and
 the
 American
 are
 not
 contradicting
 one
 another.
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
6

 Obviously,
 there
 are
 different
 sorts
 of
 cups.
 Some
 are
 drinking
 cups
 and
 some
 
are
 not
 (e.g.,
 athletic
 cups).
 Perhaps
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 is
 ambiguous
 between
 those
 
kinds
 of
 cases.
 But
 that
 is
 not
 relevant
 to
 this
 case.
 
 

  28
 
This
 helps
 explain
 why
 mere
 verbal-­‐ness
 of
 C2
 is
 subtler
 than
 the
 mere
 verbal-­‐
ness
 of
 A2.
 
It
 seems
 clear
 to
 me
 that
 what
 is
 generating
 the
 dispute
 between
 Jenny
 
and
 Jackson
 is
 some
 difference
 between
 them
 with
 respect
 to
 their
 basic
 
dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘cup’.
 They
 have
 different
 ways
 of
 using
 the
 term
 that
 
seem
 to
 be
 determined
 by
 something
 other
 than
 differing
 non-­‐linguistic
 beliefs.
 
Furthermore,
 it
 seems
 that
 this
 difference
 between
 them
 cannot
 be
 done
 away
 
with
 by
 anything
 other
 than
 a
 lesson
 in
 the
 proper
 use
 of
 the
 term.
 It
 does
 not
 
appear
 to
 be
 a
 dispute
 that
 could
 be
 settled
 by
 going
 out
 into
 the
 world
 and
 
looking
 at
 drinking
 vessels
 made
 of
 glass
 that
 Jenny
 wants
 to
 apply
 the
 term
 to
 
but
 Jackson
 does
 not.
 It
 is
 already
 clear
 that
 they
 are
 not
 going
 to
 agree
 on
 the
 
terms
 of
 the
 investigation.
 If
 they
 set
 out
 to
 examine
 cups
 and
 see
 if
 any
 of
 them
 
are
 made
 of
 glass,
 they
 are
 not
 going
 to
 agree
 exactly
 on
 which
 objects,
 
specifically,
 are
 to
 be
 examined.
 
It
 is
 important
 to
 make
 something
 clear
 at
 this
 point.
 I
 am
 building
 into
 the
 
example
 that
 Jackson
 will
 not,
 even
 upon
 the
 deepest
 reflection,
 feel
 like
 applying
 
the
 term
 ‘cup’
 to
 glass
 vessels.
 But
 this
 does
 not
 mean
 that
 we
 cannot
 imagine
 a
 
different
 case
 in
 which
 upon
 reflection
 he
 does
 change
 his
 tune.
 Imagine
 him
 
going
 out
 and
 seeing
 a
 number
 of
 glass
 vessels
 that
 are
 the
 exact
 same
 size
 and
 
shape
 as
 a
 bunch
 of
 other
 vessels
 that
 happen
 to
 be
 made
 out
 of
 plastic.
 We
 can
 
imagine
 a
 person
 reflecting
 on
 these
 objects
 and
 their
 similarities
 and
 deciding
 
that
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 does
 refer
 to
 glass
 vessels.
 

  29
 
Let’s
 say
 Jackson
 has
 a
 brother
 named
 Jetson
 and
 that
 Jetson
 has
 this
 
experience.
 We
 can
 imagine
 that
 Jetson
 thinks
 one
 of
 two
 things,
 either
 that
 it
 is
 
in
 accordance
 with
 what
 he
 meant
 all
 along
 that
 glass
 vessels
 are
 cups
 (and
 he
 
just
 did
 not
 realize
 it
 until
 he
 reflected
 deeply
 on
 it)
 or
 that
 even
 though
 the
 term
 
does
 not
 apply
 to
 glass
 vessels,
 it
 should.
 In
 the
 second
 type
 of
 case,
 it
 seems
 
obvious
 that
 if
 he
 feels
 like
 revising
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 that
 does
 not
 change
 
the
 fact
 that
 he
 meant
 what
 he
 meant
 before
 his
 revision.
 So
 any
 dispute
 he
 was
 
engaged
 in
 prior
 to
 his
 revision
 is
 one
 in
 which
 he
 is
 using
 the
 term
 in
 the
 old
 way
 
and,
 thus,
 engaging
 in
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 with
 someone
 like
 Jenny.
 The
 first
 
type
 of
 case,
 in
 which
 he
 finds
 out
 that
 he
 was
 misapplying
 the
 term,
 given
 the
 
meaning
 that
 he
 has
 historically
 associated
 with
 the
 term,
 is
 arguably
 one
 in
 
which
 any
 disagreement
 like
 C2
 that
 he
 engaged
 in
 with
 someone
 like
 Jenny
 
should
 not
 end
 up
 counting
 as
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 And,
 so,
 an
 important
 
feature
 of
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 might
 be
 that
 the
 disputants
 would
 not,
 upon
 
deep
 reflection,
 change
 their
 minds
 about
 what
 they
 mean
 by
 some
 central
 term
 
of
 the
 dispute.
 
D1:
 
Finally,
 and
 most
 controversially,
 let
 us
 consider
 a
 pair
 of
 disputes
 between
 two
 
philosophers,
 Smith
 and
 Jones.
 The
 first
 is
 a
 dispute
 about
 how
 many
 objects
 are
 
on
 the
 table
 in
 the
 next
 room.
 Smith
 and
 Jones
 just
 walked
 through
 the
 room
 with
 
the
 table
 in
 it,
 each
 taking
 a
 glance
 at
 the
 table.
 There
 happens
 to
 be
 a
 picture
 
sitting
 flat
 on
 the
 table.
 It
 blends
 in
 with
 the
 tablecloth
 and
 is
 easy
 to
 miss.
 This
 
dispute
 is
 clearly
 substantive:
 

  30
 
Smith:
 What
 was
 that
 on
 the
 table
 back
 there?
 
Jones:
 Huh?
 There
 wasn’t
 anything
 on
 it.
 
Smith:
 Yeah,
 there
 was
 an
 object
 on
 the
 table.
 But
 I
 looked
 so
 quickly
 that
 I
 
couldn’t
 tell
 what
 it
 was.
 Was
 it
 a
 picture
 of
 Manny
 Ramirez?
 
Jones:
 Um…I
 don’t
 know
 what
 to
 tell
 you.
 There
 wasn’t
 an
 object
 on
 the
 
table.
 The
 table
 had
 nothing
 on
 it
 at
 all.
 No
 picture.
 Nothing.
 
D2:
 
The
 second
 dispute
 is
 about
 how
 many
 objects
 are
 on
 some
 table
 in
 front
 of
 Smith
 
and
 Jones.
 Imagine
 that
 there
 are
 two
 forks
 on
 the
 table,
 and
 no
 other
 simple
 
objects.
 This
 example
 seems
 to
 be
 importantly
 different
 from
 the
 one
 with
 the
 
picture
 on
 the
 table:
 
Smith:
 I’m
 telling
 you,
 there
 are
 only
 two
 objects
 on
 this
 table.
 They
 are
 
both
 forks.
 
Jones:
 
 You’re
 wrong,
 there
 are
 three
 objects:
 the
 two
 forks
 and
 the
 
mereological
 sum
 of
 the
 forks.
 
Smith:
 No,
 there
 is
 no
 object
 on
 the
 table
 that
 is
 made
 of
 each
 of
 those
 
forks.
 That’s
 not
 an
 object.
 We
 can
 think
 of
 the
 pair
 of
 forks
 together.
 But
 
that
 doesn’t
 mean
 that
 they
 compose
 some
 third
 object.
 
Jones:
 I
 guess
 I
 agree
 that
 the
 fact
 we
 can
 think
 of
 them
 together
 doesn’t
 
mean
 that
 they
 compose
 some
 third
 object.
 But
 they
 do,
 in
 fact,
 compose
 a
 
third
 object.
 
And
 so
 on.
 
 

  31
 
What
 we
 have
 here
 are
 two
 philosophers
 engaged
 in
 two
 different
 kinds
 of
 
disputes.
 Again,
 the
 first
 dispute
 (D1)
 is
 uncontroversially
 substantive.
 There
 is
 
nothing
 about
 that
 example
 that
 should
 make
 us
 think
 that
 Smith
 and
 Jones
 are
 
using
 the
 terms
 ‘there
 are’
 or
 ‘object’
 (or
 any
 other
 term
 in
 the
 dispute)
 in
 
fundamentally
 different
 ways.
 It
 is
 just
 that
 Smith
 saw
 the
 picture
 on
 the
 table
 
and
 Jones
 did
 not.
 
 
 
 
 
In
 the
 second
 dispute
 (D2)
 Smith
 and
 Jones
 disagree
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 
the
 two
 forks
 make
 up
 a
 third
 object.
 A
 question
 we
 can
 ask
 is
 whether
 or
 not
 this
 
dispute
 is
 relevantly
 similar
 to
 the
 three
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 above
 (A2,
 B2,
 
and
 C2).
 On
 one
 view,
 it
 is
 not.
 Clearly,
 someone
 who
 takes
 this
 view
 might
 say,
 
this
 is
 a
 substantive
 dispute
 about
 the
 amount
 of
 objects
 on
 the
 table.
 Smith
 and
 
Jones
 are
 making
 contradictory
 claims
 and
 have
 contradictory
 beliefs.
 And
 that
 is
 
all
 there
 is
 to
 the
 dispute
 being
 substantive.
 If
 it
 is
 substantive,
 then
 it
 is
 not
 
merely
 verbal.
 Thus,
 it
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 
This
 line
 of
 reasoning
 might
 be
 a
 bit
 fast,
 though.
 A
 skeptic
 might
 take
 the
 
view
 that
 there
 is
 nothing
 really
 to
 this
 dispute,
 because
 it
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 All
 
that
 is
 going
 on,
 as
 in
 A2,
 B2,
 and
 C2,
 is
 that
 the
 participants
 are
 using
 some
 
relevant
 piece
 of
 terminology
 fundamentally
 differently
 from
 one
 another.
 This
 is
 
consistent
 with
 them
 making
 contradictory
 claims
 and
 having
 contradictory
 
beliefs
 about
 the
 subject
 matter
 of
 the
 dispute.
 As
 partially
 mentioned
 above,
 in
 
the
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 involving
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 (C2),
 it
 seems
 like
 we
 should
 
say
 that
 even
 though
 it
 is
 merely
 verbal,
 the
 disputants
 make
 contradictory
 
claims
 and
 possess
 contradictory
 beliefs
 about
 the
 drinking
 vessel.
 So,
 if
 we
 are
 

  32
 
okay
 describing
 that
 dispute
 as
 merely
 verbal,
 we
 should
 be
 okay
 describing
 this
 
one
 as
 merely
 verbal.
 Or,
 at
 the
 very
 least,
 if
 we
 feel
 comfortable
 saying
 that
 there
 
is
 something
 similar
 going
 on
 between
 the
 second
 halves
 of
 each
 pair
 of
 examples
 
(A2,
 B2,
 C2,
 and
 D2)
 that
 makes
 them
 different
 from
 the
 first
 halves
 (A1,
 B1,
 C1,
 
and
 D1),
 then
 we
 may
 have
 our
 collective
 eye
 on
 an
 interesting
 feature
 that
 
seems
 similar
 to
 mere
 verbal-­‐ness.
 I
 am
 calling
 disputes
 with
 that
 feature
 ‘merely
 
verbal’.
 And
 it
 seems
 we
 maybe
 should
 think
 of
 them
 in
 a
 similar
 way
 to
 how
 we
 
think
 of
 disputes
 that
 are
 uncontroversially
 merely
 verbal.
 That
 is,
 we
 should
 
identify
 them
 when
 possible.
 And
 insofar
 as
 we
 do
 not
 think
 that
 ordinary
 merely
 
verbal
 disputes
 are
 very
 interesting,
 we
 should
 think
 the
 same
 of
 disputes
 of
 this
 
sort.
 
My
 sense
 is
 that
 D2
 is
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 But
 it
 is
 important
 to
 be
 
clear
 that
 I
 am
 not
 committing
 to
 the
 claim
 that
 D2
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 am
 not
 
saying
 that
 we
 have
 best
 reason
 to
 believe
 that
 it
 is
 similar
 enough
 to
 ordinary
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes
 to
 be
 grouped
 with
 them
 in
 any
 important
 way.
 I
 am
 
leaving
 this
 an
 open
 question.
 A2,
 B2,
 and
 C2
 are,
 in
 my
 opinion,
 merely
 verbal.
 
But
 D2
 mirrors
 a
 controversial
 philosophical
 dispute,
 about
 which
 meta-­‐
ontologists
 disagree.
 I
 would
 not
 presume
 that
 putting
 it
 next
 to
 a
 few
 merely
 
verbal
 disputes
 should
 settle
 the
 meta-­‐ontological
 dispute
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 
it
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 It
 is
 included
 here
 to
 give
 the
 reader
 a
 sense
 of
 what
 sort
 of
 
philosophical
 dispute
 we
 might
 end
 up
 seeing,
 after
 further
 investigation,
 as
 
being
 merely
 verbal.
 

  33
 
Below,
 I
 will
 consider
 some
 characterizations
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 
that
 philosophers
 have
 recently
 given.
 
 These
 are
 not
 the
 only
 views
 out
 there
7
,
 
but
 they
 are
 the
 most
 promising,
 given
 the
 assumptions
 I
 am
 asking
 the
 views
 to
 
take
 on.
 In
 discussing
 these
 views,
 if
 I
 find
 that
 they
 are
 not
 consistent
 with
 the
 
externalist
 assumptions
 I
 want
 to
 make,
 or
 that
 they
 clearly
 do
 not
 generate
 A2,
 
B2,
 C2,
 and
 D2
 as
 merely
 verbal,
 that
 will
 count
 against
 them.
 
3.
 THE
 VIEWS
 OF
 CHALMERS,
 JENKINS,
 AND
 SIDER
 
In
 this
 section,
 I
 will
 consider
 three
 views
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 Each
 is
 a
 
view
 of
 what
 it
 takes
 for
 a
 dispute
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 And
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 
each
 view
 is
 arguably
 an
 attempt
 to
 capture
 the
 feature
 to
 which
 I
 draw
 focus
 in
 
the
 previous
 section.
 I
 will
 evaluate
 them
 with
 respect
 to
 that
 assumption.
 
Another
 dimension
 along
 which
 I
 will
 evaluate
 the
 views
 is
 with
 respect
 to
 how
 
well
 they
 do
 in
 the
 face
 of
 externalist
 views
 of
 semantic
 and
 belief
 content
 
determination.
 
David
 Chalmers
 puts
 forth
 a
 view
 of
 what
 he
 calls
 ‘verbal
 disputes’.
 His
 
verbal
 disputes
 seem
 to
 be
 what
 I
 am
 calling
 ‘merely
 verbal
 disputes’.
 Chalmers
 
differentiates
 between
 what
 he
 calls
 narrow
 and
 broad
 verbal
 disputes.
 Narrow
 
verbal
 disputes
 are
 disputes
 in
 which
 the
 participants
 express
 different
 
propositions
 with
 the
 same
 sentence,
 but
 do
 not
 realize
 they
 are
 doing
 that.
 The
 
difference
 in
 the
 propositions
 expressed
 accounts
 for
 the
 appearance
 of
 a
 
disagreement.
 Broad
 verbal
 disputes
 are
 ones
 in
 which
 the
 disputants
 can
 mean
 
the
 same
 thing
 (in
 the
 public
 language)
 by
 the
 use
 of
 some
 disputed
 sentence,
 but
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
7

 Bennett
 (2009),
 Sidelle
 (2008)
 

 

  34
 
in
 which
 there
 still
 is
 some
 sort
 of
 difference
 in
 the
 way
 in
 which
 they
 use
 some
 
relevant
 term(s)
 of
 the
 dispute.
 Chalmers,
 rightly,
 focuses
 on
 broad
 verbal
 
disputes.
 He
 appreciates
 that
 we
 have
 reason
 to
 think
 that
 meanings
 of
 terms
 are,
 
to
 some
 extent,
 determined
 by
 factors
 (social
 and
 non-­‐social)
 that
 are
 not
 under
 
the
 control
 of
 the
 individual
 speaker.
 (This
 is
 important
 because
 there
 do
 seem
 to
 
be
 disputes
 in
 which
 there
 is
 no
 obvious
 ambiguity
 involved,
 yet
 we
 still
 feel
 like
 
saying
 that
 they
 are
 merely
 verbal.)
 He
 goes
 on
 to
 offer
 a
 characterization
 of
 such
 
verbal
 disputes.
 For
 Chalmers,
 a
 dispute
 over
 some
 sentence
 S
 is
 broadly
 verbal
 
when:
8

 
A
 dispute
 over
 S
 is
 (broadly)
 verbal
 when
 for
 some
 expression
 T
 in
 S,
 the
 
parties
 disagree
 about
 the
 meaning
 of
 T,
 and
 the
 dispute
 over
 S
 arises
 
wholly
 in
 virtue
 of
 this
 disagreement
 regarding
 T.
 
There
 does
 not
 seem
 to
 be
 anything
 too
 objectionable,
 for
 the
 purposes
 of
 getting
 
a
 general
 sense
 of
 the
 basic
 notion
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes,
 about
 the
 
characterization
 that
 Chalmers
 gives
 here.
 
 He
 gives
 a
 good
 gloss
 on
 the
 notion
 of
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes,
 or
 at
 least
 the
 one
 on
 which
 I
 am
 attempting
 to
 focus.
 
 
 
Chalmers
 seems
 to
 attempt
 to
 cover
 his
 bases
 by
 inserting
 the
 part
 about
 
the
 speakers
 disagreeing
 about
 the
 meaning
 of
 some
 term
 T.
 So,
 if
 appealing
 to
 
the
 disputants
 using
 the
 terms
 differently
 does
 not
 work,
 he
 can
 fall
 back
 on
 the
 
idea
 that
 they
 have
 different
 meta-­‐linguistic
 beliefs
 about
 the
 meanings
 of
 the
 
terms
 in
 question.
 It
 would
 be
 nice
 to
 see
 what
 he
 has
 in
 mind
 here,
 exactly.
 But
 
one
 problem
 that
 pops
 up
 is,
 again,
 our
 beliefs
 are
 going
 to
 be
 affected
 by
 the
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
8

 Chalmers
 (2011),
 p.
 7
 

  35
 
semantics
 of
 the
 public
 terms
 that
 we
 use
 to
 form
 and
 express
 those
 beliefs.
 And
 
our
 beliefs
 about
 the
 meaning
 of
 some
 term,
 insofar
 as
 they
 are
 going
 to
 make
 it
 
possible
 to
 diverge
 from
 one
 another,
 are
 going
 to
 be
 something
 like
 a
 set
 of
 
metalinguistic
 beliefs
 for
 the
 application
 conditions
 of
 the
 term
 in
 question.
 In
 
order
 to
 get
 at
 the
 more
 private
 or
 personal
 aspect
 of
 a
 speaker’s
 relationship
 
with
 the
 public
 meaning
 of
 the
 terms
 of
 his
 language,
 there
 might
 need
 to
 be
 a
 
way
 to
 talk
 about
 those
 beliefs
 of
 speakers
 which
 are
 not
 affected
 by
 factors
 
external
 to
 them.
 Chalmers
 does
 not
 seem
 to
 help
 us
 here.
 
Given
 the
 lack
 of
 extreme
 precision
 of
 Chalmers’
 characterization,
 when
 
ignoring
 the
 part
 of
 his
 view
 that
 builds
 in
 something
 like
 metalinguistic
 beliefs
 
about
 the
 application
 conditions
 of
 a
 term
 as
 an
 option,
 the
 view
 is
 not
 as
 useful
 
as
 it
 could
 be,
 and
 it
 seems
 to
 run
 afoul
 of
 the
 assumptions
 about
 content
 
determination
 that
 I
 am
 making
 in
 this
 part
 of
 the
 project.
 It
 might
 be
 worth
 
trying
 to
 help
 Chalmers
 out
 by
 altering
 his
 view
 in
 order
 to
 make
 it
 more
 precise
 
in
 the
 relevant
 way.
 However,
 it
 is
 not
 necessary,
 given
 that
 other
 views,
 which
 
we
 will
 consider
 below,
 already
 do
 a
 better
 job
 on
 this
 account.
 
The
 next
 view
 I
 will
 consider
 is
 that
 of
 Carrie
 Jenkins.
 Jenkins
 states
 her
 
view
 as
 follows:
9

 
 
“Parties
 A
 and
 B
 are
 having
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 iff
 they
 are
 engaged
 in
 
a
 sincere
 prima
 facie
 dispute
 D,
 but
 do
 not
 disagree
 over
 the
 subject
 
matter
 of
 D,
 and
 merely
 present
 the
 appearance
 of
 doing
 so
 owing
 to
 their
 
divergent
 uses
 of
 some
 relevant
 portion
 of
 language.”
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
9

 Merely
 Verbal
 Disputes
 (forthcoming
 in
 Erkenntnis).
 

  36
 
In
 this
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes,
 Jenkins
 falls
 prey
 to
 externalist
 
motivated
 worries.
 
 The
 controversial
 aspect
 of
 her
 characterization
 is
 the
 part
 
that
 has
 to
 do
 with
 the
 subject
 matter
 of
 the
 dispute.
 Given
 a
 subtle
 enough
 
merely
 verbal
 dispute
 (like
 B2,
 C2,
 and,
 possibly,
 D2),
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 we
 can
 
imagine
 the
 disputants
 not
 agreeing
 on
 the
 subject
 matter
 of
 the
 dispute,
 given
 a
 
natural
 way
 of
 thinking
 of
 what
 counts
 as
 the
 subject
 matter
 of
 a
 dispute.
 Again,
 
in
 the
 dispute
 involving
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 the
 disputants
 have
 different
 beliefs
 about
 
whether
 or
 not
 the
 drinking
 vessel
 in
 question
 is
 a
 cup.
 The
 beliefs
 that
 they
 have,
 
that
 are
 expressed
 by
 the
 relevant
 sentences
 of
 the
 dispute,
 contradict
 one
 
another.
 Perhaps
 there
 is
 no
 more
 to
 disagreeing
 about
 the
 subject
 matter
 than
 
that
 the
 disputants
 have
 contradictory
 beliefs
 with
 respect
 to
 it.
 
 
Jenkins
 appeals
 to
 a
 notion
 of
 
 “less-­‐than-­‐fully-­‐externalist”
 belief
10

 in
 order
 
to
 help
 her
 articulate
 the
 sense
 in
 which
 she
 thinks
 the
 subject
 matter
 is
 not
 
really
 in
 dispute.
 With
 respect
 to
 these
 less-­‐than-­‐fully-­‐externalist
 beliefs
 of
 the
 
disputants,
 in
 the
 subtler
 merely
 verbal
 disputes,
 there
 would
 be
 no
 
contradiction.
 In
 the
 example
 with
 Jackson
 and
 Jenny,
 for
 instance,
 their
 less-­‐
than-­‐fully-­‐externalist
 beliefs
 would
 not
 conflict
 with
 each
 other.
 Thus,
 according
 
to
 Jenkins,
 there
 is
 no
 real
 disagreement
 about
 the
 subject
 matter
 of
 the
 dispute.
 
Insofar
 as
 her
 view
 relies
 on
 such
 a
 non-­‐externalist
 view
 of
 belief
 content,
 it
 is
 not
 
in
 line
 with
 the
 externalist
 assumptions
 that
 I
 wish
 to
 make
 here.
 It
 might
 be
 fine
 
for
 those
 with
 more
 internalist
 inclinations.
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
10

 She
 appeals
 to
 this
 notion
 in
 footnote
 7
 of
 her
 paper
 “Merely
 Verbal
 Disputes”
 
where
 she
 writes:
 “I
 must
 also
 specify
 that…I
 am
 taking
 belief
 contents
 to
 be
 
individuated
 in
 less-­‐than-­‐fully-­‐externalist
 way
 that
 is
 more
 closely
 related
 to
 
speaker-­‐meaning
 than
 meaning
 in
 a
 public
 language.”
 

  37
 

  Another
 problem
 with
 this
 view
 is,
 as
 with
 the
 view
 of
 Chalmers,
 it
 relies
 
on
 a
 somewhat
 imprecise
 way
 of
 talking
 about
 the
 speakers
 using
 terms
 
differently.
 In
 a
 gloss
 on
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 this
 sort
 of
 language
 seems
 
perfectly
 acceptable.
 But
 if
 we
 want
 to
 get
 a
 firmer
 grip
 on
 the
 feature
 of
 these
 
disputes
 that
 we
 find
 interesting
 in
 this
 context,
 we
 need
 to
 get
 clearer,
 it
 seems,
 
about
 how
 it
 is
 that
 the
 speakers
 diverge
 in
 usage
 when
 engaged
 in
 a
 merely
 
verbal
 dispute.
 Jenkins
 seems
 to
 do
 no
 better
 than
 Chalmers
 on
 this
 count.
 Both
 
of
 them
 are
 relying
 too
 much
 on
 the
 reader’s
 intuitive
 understanding
 of
 the
 
difference
 between
 substantive
 and
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 (To
 be
 clear,
 relying
 
on
 such
 intuitions
 would
 be
 more
 understandable
 if
 their
 focus
 were
 something
 
other
 than
 finding
 an
 accurate
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 In
 
philosophy
 we
 often
 do
 not
 demand
 exact
 precision
 with
 our
 conceptual
 tools.
 
We
 just
 need
 them
 to
 be
 sharp
 enough
 to
 do
 the
 job.
 However,
 given
 that
 the
 
notion
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 is
 the
 subject
 matter
 here
 and
 not
 some
 tool
 
used
 to
 get
 at
 the
 subject
 matter,
 it
 seems
 fair
 to
 hold
 these
 views
 to
 a
 higher
 
standard
 of
 precision.)
 
The
 third
 and
 final
 view
 I
 will
 consider
 in
 this
 section
 is
 that
 of
 Ted
 Sider
 
(2006).
 Unlike
 Chalmers
 and
 Jenkins,
 Sider
 is
 engaged
 in
 a
 discussion
 about
 
meta-­‐ontology
 that
 focuses
 on
 disputes
 in
 metaphysics
 thought
 by
 some
 to
 be
 
merely
 verbal,
 e.g.,
 the
 dispute
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 mereological
 sums
 exist.
 His
 
main
 conversational
 partner
 (with
 respect
 to
 this
 issue)
 is
 Hirsch.
 With
 respect
 to
 
the
 dispute
 over
 the
 existence
 of
 mereological
 sums,
 Hirsch
 believes
 that
 it
 is
 a
 

  38
 
merely
 verbal
 dispute
11
.
 Sider
 does
 not.
 In
 the
 process
 of
 defending
 his
 position
 
that
 this
 dispute
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal,
 Sider
 gives
 an
 account
 of
 what
 it
 is
 for
 a
 
dispute
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 He
 does
 not
 take
 his
 account
 to
 classify
 the
 dispute
 
about
 mereological
 sums
 as
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 Instead,
 his
 account
 
classifies
 the
 dispute
 about
 mereological
 sums
 as
 a
 substantive
 dispute.
 
Sider
 writes
 that
 “to
 say
 that
 an
 apparent
 dispute
 over
 some
 sentence
 S
 is
 
a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 is
 to
 say
 that
 the
 disputants
 do
 not
 mean
 the
 same
 thing
 
by
 the
 sentence
 S,
 and
 that
 what
 one
 says
 by
 uttering
 S
 is
 consistent
 with
 what
 
the
 other
 says
 by
 uttering
 not-­‐S”.
12

 As
 he
 admits,
 in
 the
 same
 section,
 “there
 are
 
many
 things
 that
 one
 can
 mean
 by
 ‘meaning’”.
13

 Sider
 seems
 to
 want
 us
 to
 
interpret
 the
 term
 ‘means’
 in
 his
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 as
 
something
 other
 than
 ‘means
 (in
 the
 public
 language)’.
 Presumably
 he
 would
 not
 
go
 through
 the
 trouble
 of
 pointing
 out
 the
 ambiguity
 of
 the
 term
 ‘meaning’
 if
 his
 
goal
 is
 to
 characterize
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 by
 appealing
 to
 something
 as
 
simple
 as
 the
 semantic
 content
 of
 our
 public
 language
 utterances.
 If
 this
 were
 his
 
strategy,
 we
 should
 expect
 him
 to
 characterize
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 by
 
appealing
 to
 ambiguity
 of
 public
 language
 terms
 or
 sentences,
 and
 leave
 it
 at
 that.
 
But
 he
 does
 not
 do
 this.
 Thus,
 he
 seems
 to
 want
 to
 allow
 for
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes
 more
 subtle
 than
 those
 generated
 by
 ambiguity
 in
 the
 public
 language.
 
Sider
 gives
 a
 necessary
 condition
 on
 meaning
 (or
 the
 sort
 on
 which
 he
 is
 
trying
 to
 focus)
 that
 says
 that
 in
 order
 for
 two
 sentences,
 S
 and
 S’,
 to
 mean
 the
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
11

 More
 on
 Hirsch’s
 view
 in
 the
 next
 section.
 
12

 “Quantifiers
 and
 Temporal
 Ontology”,
 Mind
 Vol.
 115,
 p.
 76.
 
13

 Sider,
 p.
 77.
 

  39
 
same
 thing
 it
 must
 not
 be
 the
 case
 that
 one
 is
 a
 genuinely
 quantified
 claim
 and
 the
 
other
 is
 not.
 In
 doing
 this,
 he
 brings
 in
 the
 idea
 that
 there
 is
 some
 best
 notion
 of
 
existence
 that
 is
 a
 candidate
 for
 what
 we
 mean
 by
 our
 quantifier
 expression
 in
 
English
 and
 what
 the
 metaphysicians
 mean
 by
 their
 quantifier
 expression.
 He
 
makes
 reference
 to
 it
 when
 characterizing
 what
 he
 calls
 ‘genuine
 quantification’.
 
Sider’s
 definition
 of
 genuine
 quantification
 goes
 as
 follows,
 “A
 claim
 is
 genuinely
 
quantified
 iff
 it
 is
 expressed
 by
 some
 sentence
 whose
 major
 connective
 is
 a
 
syntactic
 quantifier
 that
 means
 this
 notion
 of
 existence.”
14

 Sider
 is
 not
 entirely
 
clear
 about
 what
 he
 means
 by
 the
 term
 ‘means’.
 The
 main
 lead
 that
 he
 gives
 us
 
about
 what
 he
 means
 by
 the
 term
 ‘means’
 in
 his
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes
 is
 a
 necessary
 condition
 about
 two
 kinds
 of
 sentences,
 instances
 of
 
which
 cannot
 be
 translated
 into
 the
 other.
 
In
 order
 to
 understand
 Sider
 here,
 it
 is
 important
 to
 get
 clear
 on
 where
 he
 
is
 coming
 from
 with
 respect
 to
 this
 notion
 of
 existence
 that
 he
 is
 employing.
 He
 is
 
relying
 on
 some
 notion
 of
 natural
 properties
 that
 seems
 akin
 to
 that
 discussed
 by
 
David
 Lewis
 (1983).
 The
 general
 idea
 is
 that
 there
 are
 some
 properties
 (or
 
relations
 or
 objects)
 that
 are
 more
 natural
 than
 others.
 Talk
 of
 them
 carves
 
nature
 at
 its
 joints,
 metaphorically
 speaking.
 And
 they
 are
 better
 candidates
 for
 
the
 meanings
 of
 our
 terms
 than
 ones
 that
 are
 less
 natural.
 This
 view
 is
 sometimes
 
called
 reference
 magnetism.
 To
 make
 the
 notion
 clearer,
 let’s
 consider
 a
 possible
 
example
 of
 it.
 Consider
 something
 like
 Kripke’s
 notion
 of
 quus,
 which
 is
 identical
 
to
 the
 notion
 of
 plus
 except
 when
 the
 numbers
 to
 be
 added
 are
 greater
 than
 1
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
14

 Sider
 (2006),
 p.
 79.
 

  40
 
trillion
15
,
 in
 which
 case
 the
 answer
 would
 be
 5.
 One
 might
 worry
 that
 it
 was
 not
 
determined
 which
 notion
 people
 use
 when
 adding
 numbers
 lesser
 than
 .
 These
 
are
 two
 candidate
 meanings
 for
 the
 term
 ‘plus’
 in
 English
 and
 from
 a
 certain
 
perspective,
 it
 looks
 as
 though
 they
 are
 equally
 determined
 by
 the
 usage
 of
 the
 
term
 ‘plus’
 by
 English
 speakers.
 Most
 speakers
 never
 have
 any
 need
 to
 add
 to
 1
 
trillion.
 Presumably,
 it
 might
 not
 be
 entirely
 clear
 which
 rule
 they
 would
 follow
 
were
 they
 to
 add
 all
 the
 way
 up
 to
 or
 above
 1
 trillion.
 
We
 can
 assume,
 for
 our
 purposes
 here,
 that
 their
 usage
 and
 intentions
 in
 
fact
 do
 not
 determine
 which
 notion
 they
 are
 using,
 quus
 or
 plus.
 Even
 given
 that
 
sort
 of
 indeterminacy,
 we
 feel
 the
 intuition
 that
 they
 mean
 plus
 when
 they
 use
 the
 
term
 ‘plus’.
 It
 seems
 crazy
 to
 think
 they
 would
 be
 using
 a
 notion
 as
 unnatural
 as
 
quus
 when
 there
 is
 another,
 much
 more
 natural,
 notion
 available
 in
 plus.
 To
 be
 
clear,
 this
 is
 not
 to
 say
 that
 our
 intuition
 is
 that
 they
 should
 be
 using
 plus.
 Our
 
intuition
 is
 that
 they
 in
 fact
 are
 using
 that
 notion,
 even
 though
 their
 usage
 and
 
intentions
 do
 not
 completely
 make
 that
 so.
 But
 if
 their
 usage
 and
 intentions
 with
 
respect
 to
 the
 term
 do
 not
 determine
 plus
 as
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 ‘plus’,
 then
 
we
 need
 to
 identify
 what
 else
 there
 is
 about
 the
 situation
 that
 might
 account
 for
 
our
 intuition
 that
 it
 is
 what
 is
 meant
 by
 the
 term.
 The
 only
 real
 candidate
 seems
 
to
 be
 the
 naturalness
 of
 the
 notion
 plus
 relative
 to
 the
 notion
 quus.
 
 
Along
 similar
 lines,
 Sider
 takes
 it
 to
 be
 the
 case
 that
 there
 is
 a
 notion
 of
 
existence
 that
 is
 the
 correct
 notion
 (of
 all
 the
 different
 existence-­‐like
 notions)
 to
 
employ
 for
 making
 inquiries
 about
 the
 world.
 This
 best
 notion
 of
 existence
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
15

 This
 is
 not
 the
 number
 used
 by
 Kripke,
 but
 it
 makes
 the
 example
 work
 even
 
better
 here,
 I
 believe.
 

  41
 
somehow
 fits
 best
 with
 the
 world
 while
 playing
 the
 central
 inferential
 role
 that
 
we
 expect
 of
 it.
 Importantly,
 it
 might
 be
 that
 the
 linguistic
 dispositions
 of
 some
 
community
 of
 speakers
 do
 not,
 alone,
 pick
 out
 this
 best,
 most
 eligible,
 candidate
 
meaning.
 Yet,
 they
 still
 might
 express
 it
 with
 their
 quantifier
 if
 it
 is
 close
 enough
 
to
 what
 would
 be
 picked
 out
 by
 their
 usage
 alone.
 That
 is,
 the
 usage
 and
 
dispositions
 of
 the
 members
 of
 some
 linguistic
 community
 might
 be
 imprecise
 in
 
such
 a
 way
 that
 it
 does
 not
 decide
 between
 two
 candidate
 meanings.
 If
 reference
 
magnetism
 is
 correct,
 then
 there
 can
 be
 something
 above
 and
 beyond
 the
 usage
 
and
 dispositions
 of
 the
 members
 of
 the
 linguistic
 community
 (the
 naturalness
 of
 
the
 candidate
 meanings)
 that
 can
 do
 the
 rest
 of
 the
 job
 in
 determining
 which
 
candidate
 meaning
 is
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 in
 question.
 
Whether
 or
 not
 we
 pick
 this
 best
 notion
 of
 existence
 out
 in
 English
 (and
 he
 
does
 not
 seem
 to
 want
 to
 rule
 it
 out),
 Sider
 thinks
 that
 it
 is
 picked
 out
 by
 the
 
quantifier
 that
 metaphysicians
 use.
 And
 since
 he
 is
 defending
 ontological
 
disputes
 as
 not
 merely
 verbal,
 this
 is
 what
 he
 is
 most
 centrally
 concerned
 with.
 (If
 
the
 reader
 thinks
 this
 language
 is
 imprecise
 or
 not
 useful,
 then
 they
 think
 the
 way
 
in
 which
 Sider
 describes
 his
 view
 is
 imprecise
 or
 not
 useful.
 Notably,
 an
 objection
 
to
 Sider’s
 view
 by
 Hirsch
 is
 that
 Sider
 is
 less
 than
 usefully
 clear
 about
 what
 the
 
world’s
 logical
 joints
 are
 and
 how
 we
 come
 to
 know
 of
 this
 best
 notion
 of
 
existence.)
 
His
 view
 has
 at
 least
 four
 important
 problems.
 One
 is
 that
 he
 is
 not
 clear
 
enough
 about
 what
 sense
 of
 ‘means’
 it
 is
 that
 he
 intends
 to
 focus
 on.
 He
 does
 not
 
need
 to
 have
 necessary
 and
 sufficient
 conditions
 for
 the
 sense
 he
 is
 interested
 in,
 

  42
 
but,
 hopefully,
 there
 are
 ways
 in
 which
 he
 could
 make
 it
 easier
 for
 his
 reader
 to
 
get
 a
 grip
 on
 the
 same
 notion
 that
 he
 has
 in
 mind
 (assuming
 that
 there
 is
 some
 
relatively
 precise
 notion
 that
 he
 has
 in
 mind).
 
 
A
 second
 problem
 with
 his
 view
 is
 that
 he
 does
 not
 clearly
 give
 content
 to
 
terms
 like
 ‘logical
 joints’
 when
 discussing
 the
 notion
 of
 existence
 that
 he
 thinks
 is
 
expressed
 by
 the
 metaphysician’s
 talk
 of
 existence.
16

 It
 would
 be
 helpful
 if
 he
 
gave
 us
 a
 clearer
 idea
 of
 what
 he
 thinks
 these
 logical
 joints
 are.
 Also,
 it
 would
 be
 
useful
 to
 know
 how
 it
 is
 that
 we
 detect
 them
 and
 the
 notions
 that
 better
 line
 up
 
with
 them.
 
A
 third
 (and
 less
 serious)
 problem
 that
 his
 view
17

 has
 (and
 that
 he
 focuses
 
on
 outside
 of
 his
 central
 characterization
 quoted
 above)
 is
 that
 he
 seems
 to
 take
 
it
 as
 important
 that
 what
 each
 speaker
 means
 by
 the
 sentence
 that
 they
 utter
 
must
 end
 up
 being
 something
 that
 the
 other
 speaker
 would
 agree
 with.
 Part
 of
 
what
 makes
 the
 dispute
 merely
 verbal,
 on
 his
 view,
 is
 not
 only
 that
 the
 speakers
 
do
 not
 disagree,
 but
 that
 they
 would
 agree
 with
 what
 the
 other
 is
 saying
 if
 they
 
truly
 understood
 what
 he
 meant.
 But
 it
 just
 is
 not
 the
 case
 that
 a
 merely
 verbal
 
dispute
 needs
 to
 involve
 underlying
 agreement
 such
 as
 this.
 We
 can
 easily
 
imagine
 a
 non-­‐philosophical
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 that
 does
 not
 have
 this
 sort
 of
 
agreement
 underlying
 it.
 
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
16

 This
 is
 a
 criticism,
 mentioned
 above,
 that
 is
 leveled
 by
 Hirsch
 (2008)
 in
 
“Ontological
 Arguments:
 Interpretive
 Charity
 and
 Quantifier
 Variance”.
 
17

 To
 be
 fair,
 this
 is
 a
 mistake
 that
 other
 people
 than
 just
 Sider
 seem
 to
 slip
 into
 
sometimes.
 It
 is
 not
 uncommon
 to
 equate
 not
 disagreeing
 with
 agreeing
 in
 a
 
fallacious
 way.
 But
 I
 assume
 that
 Sider
 and
 others
 would
 agree
 with
 me
 here
 if
 
asked.
 

  43
 
For
 instance,
 go
 back
 to
 the
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 involving
 the
 term
 
‘football’
 (A2),
 the
 most
 obvious
 case
 that
 we
 have
 considered.
 
 Imagine
 that
 the
 
American
 has
 never
 heard
 of
 soccer.
 When
 the
 Briton
 says
 that
 soccer
 is
 the
 most
 
brilliant
 sport
 (using
 the
 term
 ‘football’
 to
 mean
 soccer)
 the
 American
 
misunderstands
 the
 claim
 and
 so
 voices
 disagreement.
 But
 if
 the
 American
 does
 
not
 know
 what
 soccer
 is,
 then
 there
 can
 be
 no
 underlying
 agreement
 with
 the
 
Briton
 about
 how
 brilliant
 the
 sport
 is.
 We
 can
 imagine
 the
 scenario
 such
 that
 
once
 it
 is
 clear
 to
 the
 American
 what
 is
 being
 claimed,
 there
 is
 no
 dispute
 and
 no
 
agreement.
 This
 fact
 gives
 us
 good
 reason
 to
 reject
 the
 claim
 that
 a
 merely
 verbal
 
dispute
 must
 involve
 underlying
 agreement.
 
Lastly,
 and
 I
 will
 discuss
 this
 issue
 more
 below,
 his
 reliance
 on
 there
 being
 
some
 best
 candidate
 for
 the
 notion
 of
 existence
 does
 not
 help
 him
 in
 the
 way
 that
 
he
 seems
 to
 think.
 He
 takes
 this
 move,
 it
 seems,
 to
 help
 settle
 the
 dispute
 about
 
whether
 or
 not
 ontological
 debates,
 such
 as
 the
 one
 between
 those
 that
 say
 
mereological
 sums
 exist
 and
 those
 that
 do
 not,
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 As
 I
 will
 argue
 
below,
 with
 respect
 to
 Hirsch’s
 and
 Manley’s
 views,
 this
 move
 does
 not
 work.
 
One
 might
 wonder
 if
 there
 are
 easy
 ways
 in
 which
 we
 might
 tease
 apart
 
the
 views
 discussed
 above.
 I
 tend
 to
 think
 that
 there
 are
 not.
 The
 difference
 
between
 the
 views
 is
 so
 subtle
 that
 they
 it
 is
 difficult
 to
 find
 sentences
 with
 
respect
 to
 which
 they
 will
 differ.
 The
 more
 interesting
 question
 is
 how
 these
 
views
 differ,
 in
 terms
 of
 what
 they
 say
 about
 cases,
 from
 the
 views
 of
 Hirsch
 and
 
Manley
 that
 I
 discuss
 below.
 

 

  44
 
4.
 THE
 VIEWS
 OF
 HIRSCH
 AND
 MANLEY
 
Another
 two
 views
 I
 will
 consider
 are
 quite
 similar
 to
 each
 other.
 I
 reserve
 them
 
for
 their
 own
 section
 due
 to
 this
 fact
 and
 that
 they
 are
 the
 closest
 I
 have
 found
 to
 
views
 that
 are
 consistent
 with
 the
 assumptions
 I
 wish
 to
 make.
 They
 are
 the
 
views
 of
 Eli
 Hirsch
 and
 David
 Manley.
 
 
As
 mentioned
 above,
 Hirsch
 takes
 a
 position
 against
 Sider
 with
 respect
 to
 
his
 diagnosis
 of
 certain
 ontological
 disputes
 as
 merely
 verbal.
 He
 takes
 disputes
 
such
 as
 those
 about
 the
 existence
 of
 mereological
 sums
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 Not
 
surprisingly,
 his
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 is
 different
 from
 
Sider’s
 in
 important
 respects.
 Hirsch
 (2005)
18

 characterizes
 a
 merely
 verbal
 
dispute
 by
 asking
 us
 to
 imagine
 the
 disputants
 as
 forming
 their
 own
 linguistic
 
communities.
 We
 are
 supposed
 to
 imagine
 linguistic
 communities
 with
 individual
 
members
 that
 possess
 the
 same
 dispositions
 to
 use
 terms
 as
 each
 actual
 speaker
 
in
 the
 dispute.
 We
 are
 to
 focus
 on
 what
 the
 disputed
 sentence
 means
 in
 each
 
imaginary
 linguistic
 community.
 If
 they
 mean
 different
 things,
 then
 the
 dispute
 is
 
merely
 verbal.
 Manley
 (2009)
19

 asks
 us
 to
 do
 something
 similar.
 His
 view
 is
 a
 
modification
 of
 Hirsch’s.
 He
 asks
 us
 to
 consider
 each
 speaker
 as
 a
 restricted
 
semantic
 supervenience
 base.
 To
 treat
 each
 speaker
 as
 a
 restricted
 
supervenience
 base
 is
 to
 consider
 them
 as
 determining
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 words
 
in
 their
 own
 language.
 We
 are
 to
 consider
 whatever
 it
 is
 about
 members
 of
 a
 
linguistic
 community
 (plausibly,
 the
 dispositions
 to
 use
 their
 terms)
 that
 goes
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
18

 “Physical-­‐Object
 Ontology,
 Verbal
 Disputes,
 and
 Common
 Sense,
 Philosophical
 
and
 Phenomenological
 Research,
 Vol.
 LXX,
 No.
 1,
 January.
 
19

 Metametaphysics:
 New
 Essays
 on
 the
 Foundation
 of
 Ontology,
 OUP.
 

  45
 
into
 contributing
 to
 the
 semantic
 content
 of
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 community’s
 
language
 and
 restrict
 ourselves
 to
 those
 features
 of
 each
 disputant.
 (This
 is
 a
 
weak
 sense
 of
 determining.
 Obviously,
 no
 one
 individual
 has
 any
 effect
 on
 the
 
public
 meaning
 of
 the
 terms
 that
 she
 uses.
 What
 we
 are
 supposed
 to
 focus
 on
 is
 
that
 which
 generally
 determines
 the
 meanings
 of
 terms
 in
 the
 public
 language.)
 
He
 then
 asks
 us
 to
 restrict
 our
 attention
 to
 each
 individual
 of
 the
 dispute
 and
 
consider
 the
 same
 features
 that
 go
 into
 determining
 the
 meaning
 of
 terms
 in
 the
 
public
 language.
 We
 are
 to
 focus
 on
 what
 each
 speaker
 means,
 when
 considered
 
as
 the
 semantic
 supervenience
 base
 of
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute.
 If
 they
 mean
 
different
 things,
 then
 they
 semantically
 deviate
 with
 respect
 to
 some
 term(s)
 of
 
the
 dispute.
 If
 they
 semantically
 deviate,
 then
 it
 is
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 

  The
 main
 difference
 between
 the
 two
 views
 is
 that
 Hirsch
 also
 wants
 to
 
build
 translatability
 and
 resolvability
 into
 his
 account,
 as
 necessary
 conditions.
 
That
 is,
 he
 thinks
 a
 dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal
 only
 if
 the
 speakers
 can,
 in
 principle,
 
translate
 sentences
 from
 the
 other’s
 imagined
 language
 into
 their
 own.
 And
 it
 
needs
 to
 be
 that
 once
 this
 translation
 is
 done,
 the
 dispute
 should
 be
 resolved.
 
Manley
 builds
 no
 such
 conditions
 into
 his
 account.
 The
 importance
 of
 this
 
difference
 comes
 out
 when
 we
 consider
 the
 possibility
 of
 two
 speakers
 that
 speak
 
their
 own
 languages
 (in
 the
 sense
 that
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 ask
 us
 to
 imagine
 or
 
consider)
 and
 who
 have
 a
 dispute
 over
 some
 sentence
 S
 such
 that
 what
 S
 means
 
in
 one
 of
 their
 languages
 is
 not
 able
 to
 be
 translated
 into
 the
 language
 of
 the
 

  46
 
other.
20

 It
 seems
 that
 Manley
 is
 correct
 in
 not
 including
 these
 conditions
 into
 his
 
account.
 It
 is
 true
 that
 some
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 are
 resolvable
 and
 the
 two
 
speakers
 can,
 in
 principle
 understand
 each
 other.
 And
 it
 might
 be
 that
 the
 
paradigmatic
 cases
 are
 like
 this.
 But
 it
 seems
 clear
 that
 two
 speakers
 in
 situations
 
such
 as
 those
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 wish
 us
 to
 consider
 can
 be
 using
 terms
 to
 pick
 
out
 properties
 (or
 relations
 or
 objects)
 for
 which
 the
 other
 does
 not
 have
 a
 term
 
in
 his
 vocabulary.
 In
 fact,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 we
 have
 this
 sort
 of
 thing
 happen
 
with
 actual
 natural
 languages.
 Some
 languages
 have
 words
 that
 express
 meanings
 
that
 are
 not
 expressed
 by
 some
 other
 language.
 And
 it
 would
 not
 be
 surprising
 to
 
find
 that
 this
 happens
 in
 different
 dialects
 of
 the
 same
 language,
 as
 well.
 
The
 move
 to
 imagine
 each
 speaker
 as
 his
 own
 linguistic
 community
 or
 as
 
the
 semantic
 supervenience
 base
 is,
 presumably,
 made
 in
 order
 to
 strip
 away
 the
 
influence
 that
 the
 actual
 linguistic
 community
 has
 on
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 sentence
 
as
 uttered
 by
 each
 speaker.
 In
 subtler
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 the
 disputants
 can
 
mean
 the
 same
 thing
 by
 the
 disputed
 sentence.
 Given
 the
 assumption
 that
 
speakers
 can
 be
 wrong
 about
 what
 the
 disputed
 sentence
 in
 a
 dispute
 means,
 one
 
of
 the
 speakers
 might
 not
 understand
 what
 some
 disputed
 sentence
 means
 in
 her
 
own
 mouth.
 
One
 way
 to
 interpret
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 here
 is
 that
 they
 are
 attempting
 
to
 account
 for
 that
 and
 find
 a
 way
 to
 get
 at
 what
 the
 individual
 is
 contributing
 to
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
20

 This
 should
 not
 be
 too
 difficult
 to
 imagine.
 It
 seems
 quite
 normal
 for
 languages
 
to
 not
 perfectly
 translate
 into
 each
 other.
 We
 notice
 this
 kind
 of
 thing
 when
 
learning
 second
 languages,
 when
 we
 are
 told
 that
 there
 is
 not
 English
 term(s)
 
that
 exactly
 captures
 what
 is
 meant
 by
 some,
 say,
 French
 term
 that
 we
 are
 trying
 
to
 incorporate
 into
 our
 vocabulary.
 

  47
 
the
 meaning
 of
 the
 public
 sentence.
 (This
 last
 claim
 is
 based
 on
 the
 assumption
 
that
 each
 member
 of
 the
 linguistic
 community
 contributes
 something
 to
 the
 
meanings
 of
 words
 in
 his
 community.
 This
 is,
 of
 course,
 consistent
 with
 it
 being
 
true
 that
 no
 member
 of
 the
 community
 is
 making
 a
 significant
 difference
 to
 what
 
the
 meaning
 of
 any
 term
 is.)
 If
 that
 which
 is
 contributed
 by
 some
 disputant
 to
 the
 
public
 meaning
 of
 the
 disputed
 sentence
 is
 different
 from
 what
 is
 contributed
 by
 
the
 other
 person
 in
 the
 dispute,
 and
 that
 is
 what
 is
 causing
 the
 dispute,
 then
 we
 
have
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 And
 this
 does
 not
 just
 hold
 true
 for
 the
 subtler
 kind
 
of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 
 
Going
 back
 to
 the
 example
 involving
 the
 term
 ‘football’,
 the
 Briton
 and
 the
 
American
 are
 arguably
 making
 different
 contributions
 to
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 
disputed
 sentence.
 The
 differences
 in
 that
 case
 have
 to
 do
 with
 the
 different
 
public
 senses
 that
 they
 are
 intending
 to
 pick
 out
 with
 their
 utterances
 of
 the
 term
 
‘football’.
 The
 Briton’s
 contribution
 to
 the
 public
 language
 is
 in
 line
 with
 the
 sense
 
of
 ‘football’
 that
 picks
 out
 soccer.
 The
 American’s
 contribution
 to
 the
 public
 
language
 is
 in
 line
 with
 the
 sense
 that
 picks
 out
 American
 football.
 Considered
 in
 
the
 ways
 that
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 ask
 us
 to
 consider
 them,
 they
 mean
 different
 
things
 by
 the
 same
 sentence.
 Thus,
 their
 dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 
What
 is
 good
 about
 these
 views,
 relative
 to
 others
 considered
 above,
 is
 
that
 they
 do
 not
 explicitly
 rely
 on
 less-­‐than-­‐fully-­‐externalist
 content
 (semantic
 or
 
belief).
 They
 do
 not
 run
 afoul
 of
 the
 externalist
 assumptions
 I
 am
 making.
 There
 
is
 something
 like
 less-­‐than-­‐fully-­‐externalist
 content
 that
 is
 appealed
 to
 by
 both
 
views,
 but
 it
 does
 not
 seem
 as
 though
 either
 view
 is
 committed
 to,
 or
 needs
 to
 be
 

  48
 
committed
 to,
 the
 actual
 existence
 of
 anything
 that
 runs
 counter
 to
 externalist
 
views
 about
 semantic
 or
 belief
 content.
 Externalists
 should
 not
 have
 a
 problem
 
with
 the
 claim
 that
 there
 is
 something
 that
 is
 contributed
 by
 individuals
 to
 the
 
semantic
 content
 of
 terms
 in
 the
 language.
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 are,
 basically,
 
saying
 that
 whatever
 happens
 to
 all
 of
 the
 contributions
 by
 all
 of
 the
 members
 of
 
the
 linguistic
 community,
 let
 us
 suppose
 that
 it
 happened
 to
 only
 the
 contribution
 
of
 one
 person.
 

  Let’s
 consider
 a
 sentence
 from
 the
 dispute
 between
 Jackson
 and
 Jenny
 
(C2).
 Jackson
 utters
 the
 following
 sentence
 to
 Jenny:
 

  (CNG)
 Cups
 aren’t
 made
 of
 glass.
 
Jenny
 does
 not
 agree
 with
 Jackson,
 she
 thinks
 that
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 glass
 and
 
so
 is
 not
 willing
 to
 assent
 to
 sentence
 (CNG).
 Now,
 let’s
 assume
 (as
 seems
 
plausible)
 that
 there
 is
 some
 fact
 of
 the
 matter
 as
 to
 whether
 or
 not
 cups
 can
 be
 
made
 of
 glass,
 given
 the
 meanings
 of
 the
 relevant
 terms
 in
 our
 public
 language.
 
Given
 that
 assumption,
 either
 sentence
 (CNG)
 is
 true
 or
 it
 is
 false.
 Let’s
 assume
 
that
 it
 is
 true.
 (It
 does
 not
 matter
 for
 this
 point
 if
 it
 is
 actually
 true
 or
 false,
 just
 
that
 it
 is
 one
 or
 the
 other.)
 
It
 seems,
 as
 I
 claim
 above
 in
 my
 discussion
 of
 C2,
 that
 this
 dispute
 is
 
merely
 verbal.
 Jackson
 and
 Jenny
 seem
 just
 to
 be
 talking
 past
 each
 other
 in
 a
 way
 
that
 is
 relevantly
 similar
 to
 the
 American
 and
 Briton
 in
 the
 football
 case.
 But
 if
 the
 
first
 group
 of
 views
 that
 I
 have
 considered
 in
 this
 chapter
 is
 correct,
 then
 Jenny
 
and
 Jackson
 are
 arguably
 not
 having
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute.
 (I
 am
 lumping
 the
 
views
 together
 here
 even
 though
 they
 might
 treat
 this
 case
 slightly
 differently
 

  49
 
from
 one
 another.
 The
 important
 thing
 is
 their
 lack
 of
 full-­‐blooded
 externalist
 
considerations.)
 They
 would
 not
 classify
 the
 dispute
 over
 sentence
 (CNG)
 as
 a
 
merely
 verbal
 dispute
 because
 the
 sentence,
 given
 the
 assumptions
 I
 make
 here,
 
means
 the
 same
 thing
 in
 the
 mouth
 of
 Jackson
 as
 it
 does
 in
 the
 mouth
 of
 Jenny.
 On
 
the
 other
 hand,
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 have
 no
 problem
 characterizing
 the
 dispute
 
over
 sentence
 (CNG)
 as
 merely
 verbal.
 (This
 is
 true
 even
 with
 respect
 to
 the
 view
 
of
 Chalmers,
 given
 that
 he
 relies
 on
 an
 internalistic
 metalinguistic
 belief
 of
 the
 
disputants
 in
 his
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 Out
 of
 the
 three
 of
 
these
 views,
 his
 is
 the
 most
 likely
 to
 be
 able
 to
 be
 saved
 from
 this
 criticism.
 Sider
 
and
 Jenkins
 cannot
 plausibly
 be
 said
 to
 have
 the
 resources
 to
 block
 it.
 But
 
Chalmers
 is
 at
 best
 possibly
 capable
 of
 avoiding
 this
 criticism,
 whereas
 Hirsch
 and
 
Manley
 are
 certainly
 capable
 of
 doing
 so.)
 
None
 of
 this
 is
 to
 say
 the
 views
 of
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 are
 perfect.
 My
 main
 
criticism
 of
 these
 two
 views
 is
 that
 they
 may
 not
 do
 enough
 to
 strip
 away
 non-­‐
social
 external
 factors,
 such
 as
 the
 effects
 of
 reference
 magnetism,
 that
 go
 into
 
determining
 the
 semantic
 content
 of
 terms.
 Hirsch
 asks
 us
 to
 imagine
 what
 a
 
speaker
 in
 a
 dispute
 would
 mean
 if
 he
 were
 embedded
 in
 a
 community
 of
 
speakers
 like
 him.
 But
 Hirsch
 does
 not
 do
 anything
 to
 control
 for
 the
 effects
 of
 
reference
 magnetism.
 (The
 same
 can
 be
 said
 for
 Manley.)
 So,
 the
 disputed
 
sentence(s)
 might
 have
 the
 same
 meaning
 in
 the
 imagined
 linguistic
 communities
 
whose
 dispositions
 are
 based
 on
 those
 of
 the
 disputants.
 If
 this
 were
 the
 case,
 
then
 his
 characterization
 would
 not
 generate
 the
 disputes
 that
 he
 wants
 it
 to.
 
Namely,
 disputes
 such
 as
 the
 one
 involving
 forks
 above
 (D2,
 the
 questionable
 

  50
 
dispute
 involving
 a
 dispute
 over
 the
 existence
 of
 a
 mereological
 sum).
 This
 is
 an
 
arguable
 weakness
 of
 his
 view
 that
 Sider
 exploits.
 Given
 Sider’s
 reliance
 on
 
reference
 magnetism
 in
 his
 exchange
 with
 Hirsch,
 Hirsch
 takes
 the
 view
 that
 
there
 is
 no
 reference
 magnetism.
 But
 he
 does
 not
 need
 to
 do
 this.
 If
 there
 is
 no
 
reference
 magnetism
 strong
 enough
 to
 make
 Sider’s
 view
 correct,
 then
 Hirsch’s
 
view
 looks
 good.
 However,
 even
 if
 there
 is
 reference
 magnetism
 of
 that
 sort,
 it
 
seems
 that
 it
 should
 not
 make
 a
 difference.
 
It
 is
 not
 at
 all
 clear
 that
 reference
 magnetism
 is
 the
 correct
 view
 to
 take
 
about
 how
 the
 semantic
 content
 of
 terms
 is
 (partially)
 determined.
 It
 is
 more
 
controversial
 than
 the
 externalist
 view
 about
 social
 factors
 influencing
 the
 
semantic
 content
 of
 terms.
 I
 have
 no
 interest
 here
 in
 arguing
 for
 or
 against
 it.
 
However,
 it
 is
 a
 view
 that
 is
 in
 play
 in
 the
 literature.
 And,
 I
 think
 it
 is
 possible
 to
 
modify
 the
 views
 of
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 to
 take
 this
 into
 account.
 (If
 it
 is
 not,
 then
 
we
 should
 take
 a
 different
 approach
 to
 characterizing
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.)
 
We
 might
 want
 to
 build
 it
 into
 their
 view
 that
 the
 effects
 of
 reference
 magnetism
 
be
 ignored
 when
 we
 talk
 about
 what
 each
 speaker
 means
 when
 only
 their
 
contribution
 to
 the
 public
 semantics
 is
 considered.
 
5.
 MODIFYING
 THE
 HIRSCH/MANLEY-­‐STYLE
 VIEW
 
It
 is
 not
 my
 view
 that
 a
 weak
 or
 strong
 form
 of
 reference
 magnetism
 is
 correct.
 
However,
 some
 might
 take
 one
 or
 the
 other
 to
 be.
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley’s
 views
 
would
 be
 strengthened
 with
 a
 modification
 that
 would
 help
 block
 a
 certain
 kind
 
of
 objection
 from
 these
 versions
 of
 reference
 magnetism.
 The
 strong
 reference
 
magnetism
 that
 I
 have
 in
 mind
 is
 one
 in
 which
 the
 “magnetic”
 effects
 of
 the
 more
 

  51
 
natural
 properties
 (or
 relations
 or
 objects)
 overwhelms
 use.
 On
 such
 a
 view,
 the
 
dispositions
 of
 the
 members
 of
 the
 linguistic
 community
 might
 determinately
 
pick
 out
 some
 less
 good
 candidate
 for
 the
 meaning
 of
 some
 term,
 but
 for
 the
 fact
 
that
 there
 is
 a
 better
 candidate
 available.
 This
 can
 be
 contrasted
 with
 a
 weaker
 
version
 of
 reference
 magnetism
 according
 to
 which,
 for
 instance,
 some
 candidate
 
meaning
 being
 better
 than
 some
 other
 candidate
 meaning
 only
 makes
 a
 semantic
 
difference
 when
 the
 dispositions
 of
 the
 linguistic
 community
 are
 imprecise
 
between
 the
 two
 candidates.
 
Clearly,
 we
 can
 at
 least
 sometimes
 get
 around
 the
 effects
 of
 reference
 
magnetism.
 Let’s
 suppose
 that
 it
 is
 true
 that
 there
 are
 some
 properties
 that
 are
 
more
 natural
 than
 other
 properties.
 This
 is
 a
 quite
 plausible
 claim.
 The
 color
 red
 
seems,
 intuitively,
 like
 a
 more
 natural
 kind
 than
 the
 disjunctive
 color
 red-­‐or-­‐
green.
 Red
 things
 are
 more
 similar
 to
 each
 other
 along
 the
 dimension
 of
 color
 
than
 are
 things
 that
 have
 the
 disjunctive
 color
 red-­‐or-­‐green.
 It
 seems
 plausible
 to
 
think
 that
 if
 the
 dispositions
 of
 our
 linguistic
 community’s
 use
 of
 the
 term
 ‘red’
 
were
 such
 that
 they
 were
 imprecise
 between
 picking
 out
 red
 and
 red-­‐or-­‐green,
 
then
 the
 naturalness
 of
 red
 would
 help
 determine
 it
 as
 the
 content
 of
 the
 term
 
‘red’.
 However,
 it
 seems
 less
 plausible
 to
 say
 that
 the
 linguistic
 community
 could
 
not,
 if
 they
 wanted
 to,
 use
 the
 term
 ‘red’
 to
 pick
 out
 the
 disjunctive
 color
 red-­‐or-­‐
green.
 (Whether
 or
 not
 we
 actually
 do
 this
 sort
 of
 thing
 is
 another
 question.
 It
 
might
 be
 that
 the
 type
 of
 concerted
 effort
 needed
 to
 pick
 out
 weird
 disjunctive
 
properties
 just
 is
 not
 something
 that
 a
 linguistic
 community
 can
 muster
 up,
 
practically
 speaking.
 This
 does
 not
 mean
 it
 is
 impossible,
 in
 a
 broader
 sense.)
 

  52
 
In
 fact,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 we
 can,
 if
 we
 do
 so
 purposefully,
 pick
 out
 all
 
sorts
 of
 unnatural
 kinds
 and
 properties,
 especially
 when
 we
 attempt
 to
 do
 so
 as
 
individuals
 or
 members
 of
 small
 groups.
 We
 just
 have
 to
 be
 clear
 about
 our
 
intentions.
 Intuitively,
 being
 very
 clear
 about
 our
 intentions
 should
 allow
 us
 to
 
pick
 out
 any
 weird
 kind
 of
 property
 we
 wish
 to.
 For
 instance,
 if
 I
 want
 to
 pick
 out
 
the
 property
 of
 being
 in
 Paris
 or
 being
 an
 elephant
 or
 being
 the
 number
 seven,
 it
 
seems
 that
 all
 I
 need
 to
 do
 is
 make
 my
 intentions
 clear
 that
 I
 meant
 to
 pick
 out
 
that
 property
 with
 the
 term
 ‘the
 property
 of
 being
 in
 Paris
 or
 being
 an
 elephant
 
or
 being
 the
 number
 seven’.
 So,
 even
 if
 our
 ordinary
 language
 terms
 tend
 to
 pick
 
out
 the
 more
 natural
 kinds
 or
 properties
 (perhaps
 even
 due
 to
 some
 general
 
intention
 we
 have
 to
 do
 so),
 it
 would
 be
 a
 truly
 radical
 version
 of
 reference
 
magnetism
 that
 says
 we
 cannot
 pick
 out
 less
 natural
 properties
 if
 we
 try
 hard
 
enough
 on
 the
 individual
 level.
 Sider
 might
 want
 to
 take
 such
 a
 view.
 But
 it
 seems
 
as
 though
 it
 would
 be
 difficult
 to
 justify.
 
 
Given
 a
 less
 radical
 sort
 of
 reference
 magnetism
 (one
 according
 to
 which
 
we
 can
 pick
 out
 less
 natural
 kinds/properties/relations,
 if
 we
 try
 hard
 enough),
 
we
 have
 a
 model
 for
 modifying
 Hirsch’s
 and
 Manley’s
 views.
 For
 Hirsch,
 imagine
 
that
 each
 speaker
 in
 some
 dispute
 is
 embedded
 in
 a
 linguistic
 community
 with
 his
 
dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute.
 For
 Manley,
 consider
 each
 speaker
 as
 
the
 restricted
 semantic
 supervenience
 base
 for
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute.
 Then,
 
take
 seriously
 the
 dispositions
 that
 each
 speaker
 has
 to
 insist
 on
 applying
 some
 
term
 to
 cases
 that
 are
 not
 instances
 of
 some
 natural
 kind/property/relation.
 
(This
 might
 end
 up
 needing
 to
 be
 an
 insistence
 on
 the
 part
 of
 the
 speaker
 to
 apply
 

  53
 
the
 term
 to
 multiple
 instances
 of
 some
 less
 natural
 kind/property/relation.)
 In
 
Hirsch’s
 scenario
 the
 communities
 centered
 around
 the
 disputants
 should
 mean
 
different
 things
 in
 case
 they
 are
 insistent
 enough
 in
 their
 application
 of
 terms
 to
 
instances
 of
 less
 natural
 kinds/properties/relations.
 Reference
 magnetism
 
should
 be
 able
 to
 do
 the
 work
 that
 it
 maybe
 normally
 does.
 In
 Manley’s
 scenario,
 
we
 consider
 just
 what
 each
 disputant
 means
 when
 we
 treat
 them
 alone
 as
 
semantic
 supervenience
 bases
 and
 take
 their
 insistence
 to
 apply
 terms
 to
 less
 
natural
 kinds
 seriously
 in
 the
 way
 just
 mentioned.
 
Even
 if
 we
 assume
 a
 radically
 strong
 sort
 of
 reference
 magnetism,
 
however,
 one
 according
 to
 which
 we
 cannot
 pick
 out
 unnatural
 properties,
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes
 of
 the
 more
 subtle
 kind
 seem
 possible.
 What
 seems
 most
 
important
 is
 that
 the
 disputants
 are
 attached
 to
 using
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute
 in
 
fundamentally
 different
 ways.
 This
 is
 a
 strong
 intuition.
 It
 is
 clearly
 most
 useful
 to
 
come
 up
 with
 a
 way
 to
 get
 more
 specific
 about
 how
 the
 disputants’
 usages
 differ
 
from
 one
 another.
 And
 that
 is
 something
 that
 I
 am
 attempting
 to
 do
 in
 this
 
project.
 But
 the
 difficulty
 of
 coming
 up
 with
 a
 useful
 account
 does
 not
 lessen
 the
 
strength
 of
 the
 intuition.
 
A
 way
 for
 Hirsch’s
 view
 to
 accommodate
 a
 strong
 version
 of
 reference
 
magnetism
 might
 be
 to
 ask
 us
 to
 go
 to
 another
 possible
 world
 in
 which
 reference
 
magnetism
 does
 not
 hold
 and
 in
 which
 the
 speaker
 is
 embedded
 in
 a
 community
 
of
 people
 relevantly
 like
 him.
 Sider
 might
 respond
 that
 there
 is
 no
 possible
 world
 
in
 which
 reference
 magnetism
 does
 not
 hold.
 This
 is
 a
 claim
 for
 which
 he
 needs
 to
 
argue.
 And
 it
 is
 not
 clear
 that
 it
 would
 be
 enough
 for
 him
 to
 establish
 that
 there
 is
 

  54
 
no
 metaphysically
 possible
 world
 in
 which
 reference
 magnetism
 does
 not
 hold.
 It
 
might
 be
 that
 he
 would
 need
 to
 establish
 that
 there
 is
 no
 epistemically
 or
 
conceptually
 possible
 world
 in
 which
 reference
 magnetism
 does
 not
 hold.
 
Manley
 might
 be
 able
 to
 ask
 the
 reader
 to
 ignore
 the
 effects
 of
 reference
 
magnetism
 in
 just
 the
 way
 that
 he
 asks
 the
 reader
 to
 ignore
 the
 social
 factors
 that
 
help
 determine
 content.
 Unless
 Sider
 wanted
 to
 say
 that
 these
 best
 candidate
 
properties
 (or
 relations
 or
 objects)
 are
 the
 only
 candidates
 for
 meaning
 (which
 he
 
explicitly
 says
 he
 does
 not),
 it
 seems
 open
 to
 both
 Hirsch
 and
 Manley
 to
 talk
 
about
 what
 properties
 (or
 relations
 or
 objects)
 are
 picked
 out
 by
 the
 terms
 of
 
some
 dispute,
 given
 the
 speakers’
 dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 terms.
 And
 if
 the
 reader
 
feels
 uncomfortable
 talking
 about
 the
 public
 terms
 picking
 out
 (or
 referring
 to
 or
 
expressing)
 meanings
 that
 are
 not
 their
 public
 meanings,
 then
 perhaps
 we
 can
 
utilize
 some
 terms
 of
 art
 that
 run
 parallel
 to
 those
 terms.
 On
 such
 a
 view,
 we
 
would
 talk
 about
 the
 terms
 picking
 out*
 (or
 referring*
 to
 or
 expressing*)
 some
 
meaning*
 that
 is
 different
 from
 the
 public
 meaning
 of
 the
 terms
 in
 question.
21

 
6.
 CONCLUSION
 
The
 reader
 should
 now
 have
 a
 sense
 of
 the
 general
 kind
 of
 dispute
 that
 I
 wish
 to
 
focus
 on
 in
 this
 project.
 It
 is
 important
 to
 remember
 that
 the
 term
 ‘merely
 verbal
 
dispute’
 is
 not
 the
 focus
 here.
 If
 one
 does
 not
 think
 that
 the
 arguably
 non-­‐
substantive
 disputes
 in
 section
 2
 of
 this
 chapter
 should
 be
 called
 merely
 verbal,
 
that
 is
 fine.
 The
 term
 is
 more
 just
 to
 give
 a
 intuitive
 jumping
 off
 point
 for
 the
 
reader.
 (And
 many
 will
 think
 it
 applies,
 I
 believe.)
 What
 is
 important
 is
 that
 there
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
21

 This
 is
 my
 attempt
 to
 briefly
 articulate
 an
 idea
 that
 David
 Manley
 has
 
mentioned
 in
 conversation.
 

  55
 
is
 some
 kind
 of
 possibly
 non-­‐substantive
 kind
 of
 dispute
 instantiated
 by
 those
 
examples
 and
 that
 this
 kind
 of
 dispute
 can
 potentially
 be
 described
 by
 some
 
theory.
 The
 theories
 discussed
 in
 the
 latter
 part
 of
 this
 chapter
 should
 be
 thought
 
of
 as
 giving
 the
 reader
 a
 sense
 of
 the
 landscape
 of
 the
 literature
 on
 that
 kind
 of
 
dispute.
 Moving
 forward,
 I
 will
 utilize
 some
 of
 the
 tools
 given
 to
 us
 by
 
Hirsch/Manley
 view
 when
 discussing
 different
 issues
 that
 arise
 when
 reflecting
 
upon
 this
 kind
 of
 dispute.
 

  Also,
 one
 might
 wonder
 what
 the
 scope
 of
 the
 project
 of
 mere
 verbalists
 is.
 
One
 might
 ask
 if
 this
 is
 a
 strategy
 that
 these
 people
 wish
 to
 employ
 in
 every
 area
 
of
 philosophy
 or
 just
 in
 some.
 I
 think
 the
 answer
 to
 this
 question
 depends
 on
 
which
 philosopher
 we
 are
 talking
 about.
 Hirsch
 seems
 to
 think
 that
 the
 general
 
dispute
 between
 platonists
 and
 nominalists
 about
 the
 existence
 of
 numbers
 is
 not
 
merely
 verbal.
 He
 does
 not
 make
 an
 argument
 for
 this,
 but
 merely
 makes
 the
 
claim.
 Chalmers
 seems
 to
 think
 that
 philosophy
 is
 riddled
 with
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes.
 He
 claims
 that
 he
 suspects
 they
 happen
 in
 every
 branch
 of
 the
 
discipline.
 I
 happen
 to
 think
 that
 there
 is
 not
 reason
 to
 rule
 out
 any
 branch
 of
 
philosophy
 as
 one
 in
 which
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 might
 occur.
 I
 do
 not
 think
 it
 
is
 necessary
 to
 make
 strong
 claims
 about
 where
 we
 ought
 to
 look
 for
 merely
 
verbal
 disputes.
 Later
 in
 this
 project
 I
 take
 the
 position
 (along
 with
 Matti
 Eklund
 
and
 Mark
 Balaguer)
 that
 disputes
 of
 a
 certain
 sort
 (ontological
 disputes)
 are
 not
 
merely
 verbal.
 This
 position
 goes
 against
 the
 position
 that
 Hirsch
 takes.
 So,
 again,
 
there
 are
 a
 variety
 of
 positions
 that
 mere
 verbalists
 (or
 those
 sympathetic
 to
 the
 
general
 mere
 verbalist
 project)
 might
 take.
 

  56
 
CHAPTER
 3
 –
 

   
   
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
 CARNAP
 AND
 HIRSCH
 
I.
 INTRODUCTION
 
The
 purpose
 of
 this
 chapter
 is
 to
 compare
 and
 distinguish
 the
 Hirsch-­‐style
 
characterization
 of
 philosophical
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 (which
 I
 take
 to
 be
 the
 
leading
22

 contemporary
 view)
 from
 Carnap’s
 characterization
 of
 metaphysical
 
disputes
 as
 meaningless
 pseudo-­‐disputes.
 Hirsch
 (2008)
23

 claims
 that
 his
 view
 is
 
roughly
 Carnapian
 with
 some
 important
 differences.
 It
 is
 important
 to
 inform
 the
 
readers
 of
 my
 project
 who
 might
 suspect
 that
 Hirsch’s
 view
 (and
 contemporary
 
views
 like
 it)
 are
 just
 versions
 of
 Carnap’s
 view
 of
 ontological
 disputes
 of
 the
 
ways
 in
 which
 they
 are
 onto
 something
 and
 of
 the
 ways
 in
 which
 they
 are
 
incorrect.
 I
 will
 first
 introduce
 and
 describe
 Carnap’s
 theory.
 Then
 I
 will
 briefly
 
re-­‐characterize
 Hirsch’s
 view
 of
 certain
 philosophical
 disputes
 as
 merely
 verbal.
 
The
 following
 two
 sections
 consist
 of
 my
 drawing
 out
 similarities
 and
 differences
 
between
 the
 two
 views.
 Finally,
 I
 will
 argue
 for
 the
 conclusion
 that
 Hirsch’s
 
theory
 is
 better
 than
 Carnap’s.
 
II.
 CARNAP’S
 VIEW
 
The
 purpose
 of
 this
 section
 is
 to
 describe
 Carnap’s
 basic
 view
 of
 philosophical
 
pseudo-­‐disputes.
 The
 task
 of
 fitting
 and
 contrasting
 this
 view
 of
 his
 with
 Hirsch’s
 
view
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 will
 be
 taken
 up
 in
 sections
 IV
 and
 V.
 
Carnap
 (1956,
 1959)
 thinks
 that
 ontological
 questions
 such
 as
 the
 
questions
 concerning
 whether
 or
 not
 physical
 things
 (in
 general),
 numbers,
 or
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
22

 Manley’s
 view
 is
 a
 version
 of
 Hirsch’s.
 
23

 “Ontology
 and
 Alternative
 Languages,”
 p.
 1.
 

  57
 
properties
 exist
 can
 be
 interpreted
 in
 a
 couple
 of
 different
 ways.
 On
 one
 reading
 
of
 these
 types
 of
 questions
 (which
 he
 calls
 internal
 questions),
 he
 takes
 the
 
answer
 to
 the
 question
 to
 be
 the
 affirmative,
 physical
 things
 numbers
 and
 
properties
 do
 exist.
 On
 another
 reading
 (what
 he
 calls
 external
 questions),
 he
 
takes
 the
 theoretical
 questions
 to
 be
 lacking
 in
 cognitive
 content
 and
 having
 no
 
answer.
 And
 he
 takes
 there
 to
 be
 a
 practical
 question
 in
 the
 neighborhood
 of
 the
 
theoretical
 question
 that
 serves
 as
 the
 only
 candidate
 for
 a
 meaningful
 question
 
that
 is
 being
 asked
 in
 such
 a
 situation.
 
Carnap
 views
 us
 as
 reasoning
 from
 within
 frameworks
 that
 are
 languages
 
(or
 language
 fragments)
 with
 rules
 about
 how
 to
 use
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 language
 
(or
 language
 fragments).
 These
 rules
 tell
 the
 speaker
 of
 the
 language
 in
 what
 
situations
 to
 apply
 terms
 and
 when
 to
 refrain
 from
 applying
 them.
 For
 instance,
 
in
 English,
 when
 we
 are
 asked
 the
 question
 ‘What
 is
 the
 sum
 of
 2
 and
 3?’
 the
 rules
 
of
 the
 language
 tell
 us
 to
 respond
 with
 ‘5’.
 Or
 when
 presented
 with
 sensory
 
evidence
 of
 a
 desk
 before
 us,
 the
 rules
 of
 the
 language
 tell
 us
 to
 apply
 the
 term
 
‘desk’
 to
 what
 we
 see.
 Once
 one
 has
 a
 grasp
 of
 the
 relevant
 rule
 certain
 questions
 
can
 be
 seen
 as
 having
 trivial
 answers.
 
 
Our
 language
 about
 physical
 things,
 numbers,
 and
 properties
 are
 all
 part
 
of
 our
 general
 framework
 (or,
 perhaps,
 are
 individualized
 but
 compatible
 
frameworks
 unto
 themselves).
 The
 questions
 that
 we
 ask
 from
 within
 the
 
frameworks
 are
 sensible,
 even
 if
 sometimes
 trivial.
 Those
 asked
 in
 a
 way
 that
 can
 
be
 considered
 external
 to
 the
 framework,
 not
 in
 accordance
 to
 the
 rules
 of
 use
 for
 
the
 terms
 of
 the
 language,
 can
 be
 divided
 into
 two
 categories:
 (1)
 meaningless
 

  58
 
questions
 that
 have
 no
 content
 and
 no
 real
 theoretical
 answer,
 and
 (2)
 
meaningful
 practical
 questions
 about
 which
 framework
 to
 adopt
 between
 
multiple
 options.
 For
 Carnap,
 certain
 metaphysical
 disputes
 seem
 sensible
 on
 
their
 face,
 but
 are
 ultimately
 not
 meaningful
 questions
 about
 theoretical
 facts.
 
They
 seem
 initially
 sensible
 due
 to
 the
 fact
 that
 they
 are
 asked
 using
 sentences
 
that
 can
 be
 used
 to
 ask
 internal
 questions.
 However,
 upon
 reflection,
 they
 turn
 
out
 to
 be,
 at
 best,
 practical
 questions
 about
 what
 framework
 to
 adopt,
 given
 our
 
purposes.
 
 
To
 take
 an
 example,
 consider
 the
 question
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 numbers
 
exist.
 Consider
 two
 philosophers
 Barkla
 and
 Bross.
 Barkla
 claims
 that
 the
 number
 
2
 does
 not
 exist.
 Bross
 claims
 that
 it
 does.
 They
 engage
 in
 a
 dispute
 over
 the
 
matter,
 making
 traditional
 nominalist
 and
 platonist
 arguments
 for
 their
 
respective
 positions.
 They
 take
 themselves
 to
 be
 debating
 a
 serious
 philosophical
 
question
 that
 has
 to
 do
 with
 the
 structure
 of
 the
 world.
 It
 feels
 deep
 to
 them,
 as
 
though
 there
 must
 be
 a
 true
 philosophical
 answer
 to
 the
 question
 ‘Does
 the
 
number
 2
 exist?’
 Carnap
 says
 that
 they
 are
 not
 actually
 having
 a
 real
 dispute.
 
They
 are
 having
 a
 pseudo-­‐dispute
 due
 to
 the
 fact
 that,
 in
 the
 deep
 theoretical
 
sense
 that
 they
 intend
 to
 ask
 the
 question,
 it
 has
 no
 real
 meaning
 or
 cognitive
 
content.
 And
 there
 is
 no
 real
 answer.
 They
 are
 wasting
 their
 time
 arguing
 over
 
nothing.
 In
 another
 sense,
 the
 less
 deep,
 less
 philosophical
 sense,
 Carnap
 says
 
that
 Bross
 is
 correct.
 Of
 course
 the
 number
 2
 exists,
 he
 says.
 Competently
 
assenting
 to
 the
 sentence
 that
 expresses
 that
 claim
 is
 tied
 up
 in
 an
 intimate
 way
 
with
 the
 adoption
 of
 the
 standard
 linguistic
 framework
 that
 we
 use.
 (Or,
 perhaps,
 

  59
 
if
 the
 speakers
 are
 uttering
 sentences
 from
 within
 different
 frameworks,
 they
 
each
 say
 something
 true
 in
 each
 framework).
 And
 what
 is
 more,
 in
 the
 only
 other
 
sense
 in
 which
 Barkla
 and
 Bross
 can
 be
 disagreeing,
 that
 is
 in
 the
 practical
 sense
 
about
 which
 framework
 to
 adopt,
 one
 with
 numbers
 or
 one
 without
 numbers,
 
Bross
 is
 correct
 as
 well.
 In
 order
 to
 do
 our
 best
 science,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 we
 
need
 to
 include
 mathematical
 language
 in
 our
 linguistic
 framework.
24

 For
 Carnap,
 
this
 is
 the
 standard
 according
 to
 which
 we
 should
 adopt
 our
 framework.
 
Carnap’s
 bottom
 level
 theoretical
 motivation
 for
 taking
 this
 general
 
framework-­‐oriented
 stance
 towards
 these
 questions
 is
 his
 verificationism.
 He
 
thinks
 that
 sentences
 (and
 sets
 of
 sentences)
 have
 cognitive
 content
 only
 if
 they
 
are
 verifiable
 or
 analytic.
 In
 order
 for
 sentences
 about
 the
 world
 to
 have
 meaning,
 
we
 must
 be
 able
 to
 verify
 whether
 or
 not
 they
 are
 true.
 Sentences
 about
 the
 
empirical
 world
 must
 be
 empirically
 verifiable
 (at
 least
 in
 principle)
 in
 order
 to
 
have
 cognitive
 content.
 Analytic
 sentences
 can
 have
 cognitive
 content,
 insofar
 as
 
they
 can
 (given
 the
 general
 linguistic
 rules
 and
 the
 rules
 associated
 with
 the
 
terms
 contained
 within
 them)
 be
 established
 as
 true
 or
 not.
 Carnap
 is
 committed
 
to
 a
 strong
 version
 of
 analyticity.
 He
 takes
 the
 analytic
 to
 be
 identical
 with
 
necessity
 and
 the
 a
 priori.
 These
 kinds
 of
 statements,
 on
 his
 view,
 do
 not
 tell
 us
 
anything
 about
 the
 world.
 And
 we
 can
 know
 them
 to
 be
 true
 given
 a
 proper
 
understanding
 of
 the
 meanings
 of
 our
 terms.
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
24

 If
 this
 is
 a
 controversial
 statement,
 the
 view
 that
 I
 am
 attributing
 to
 Carnap
 
about
 the
 necessity
 of
 mathematics
 for
 our
 best
 science,
 then
 we
 can
 suppose
 
that
 I
 am
 merely
 giving
 something
 that
 Carnap
 might
 say.
 

  60
 
Importantly,
 ontological
 questions
 such
 as
 the
 questions
 about
 whether
 or
 
not
 the
 external
 world,
 numbers,
 or
 properties
 exist
 are
 not
 verifiable.
 The
 
existence
 of
 the
 external
 world,
 for
 instance,
 is
 something
 that
 we
 take
 as
 given
 
(in
 a
 sense
 of
 ‘given’
 that
 is
 compatible
 with
 our
 not
 having
 a
 belief
 with
 content
 
in
 the
 external
 world)
 before
 any
 attempt
 to
 empirically
 verify
 any
 claim.
 If
 we
 do
 
not
 take
 it
 as
 given,
 then
 we
 do
 not
 have
 the
 resources
 with
 which
 to
 verify
 any
 
claim.
 Taking
 the
 question
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 external
 world
 exists
 as
 an
 
internal
 question,
 all
 that
 we
 need
 to
 do
 is
 take
 in
 the
 evidence
 of
 our
 senses
 to
 
have
 our
 answer.
 The
 rules
 of
 the
 language
 that
 tell
 us
 how
 to
 use
 our
 terms
 and
 
say
 that
 we
 should
 apply
 the
 language
 of
 external
 objects
 and
 things
 (with
 terms
 
like
 ‘chair’
 and
 ‘desk’
 and
 so
 on)
 to
 those
 aspects
 of
 our
 sensory
 experience
 that
 
seem
 like
 external
 objects
 or
 things
 (things
 like
 chairs
 and
 desks
 and
 so
 on).
 
Taken
 as
 an
 external
 theoretical
 question,
 we
 cannot
 verify
 either
 the
 affirmative
 
or
 the
 negative
 answer
 to
 the
 question.
 The
 rules
 of
 the
 language
 do
 not
 tell
 us
 
how
 to
 answer
 the
 question
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 these
 objects
 or
 things
 really
 exist.
 
So,
 given
 verificationism,
 the
 question
 has
 no
 cognitive
 content.
 The
 only
 non-­‐
internal
 question
 that
 we
 might
 encounter
 that
 has
 content
 is
 the
 one
 about
 
whether
 or
 not
 some
 framework
 is
 more
 useful.
 
To
 get
 clearer
 on
 this
 last
 point,
 consider
 two
 general
 theories,
 the
 
standard
 realist
 framework
 with
 respect
 to
 the
 external
 world
 and
 the
 
Berkeleyan
 theory
 that
 all
 of
 what
 seems
 to
 be
 the
 external
 world
 is
 actually
 just
 
a
 product
 of
 mind.
 Our
 evidence
 for
 each
 of
 these
 theories
 is
 equal.
 Every
 
experience
 we
 have
 supports
 the
 realist
 theory
 just
 as
 much
 (and
 no
 more)
 as
 it
 

  61
 
supports
 the
 Berkeleyan
 theory.
 There
 is
 a
 sense
 in
 which
 these
 theories
 
represent
 different
 frameworks,
 different
 ways
 of
 describing
 our
 experiences.
 
For
 Carnap,
 the
 two
 theories
 do
 not
 differ
 in
 content
 due
 to
 the
 fact
 that
 they
 are
 
equally
 supported
 by
 the
 evidence.
 For
 him,
 the
 only
 question
 we
 can
 ask,
 with
 
respect
 to
 evaluating
 them,
 is
 which
 one
 is
 better
 for
 our
 goals.
 And
 insofar
 as
 it
 is
 
easier
 for
 us
 to
 use
 the
 realist
 framework
 for
 our
 empirical
 investigations,
 that
 is
 
the
 framework
 that
 we
 should
 adopt.
 
In
 contrast
 to
 the
 question
 of
 the
 existence
 of
 the
 external
 world,
 the
 
question
 about
 the
 existence
 of
 numbers,
 when
 asked
 from
 within
 a
 framework
 
(as
 an
 internal
 question),
 is
 purely
 analytic
 for
 Carnap.
 Purely
 mathematical
 
claims
 (as
 opposed
 to
 claims
 that
 are
 partially
 mathematical
 and
 partially
 
empirical)
 are
 not
 empirical
 claims.
 Since
 they
 are
 not
 verifiable,
 if
 they
 are
 to
 
have
 meaning
 for
 him,
 they
 must
 be
 analytic.
 If
 the
 framework
 uses
 mathematical
 
language,
 then
 numbers
 trivially
 exist.
 If
 it
 does
 not,
 then
 they
 trivially
 do
 not
 
exist.
 (Or,
 at
 the
 very
 least,
 it
 is
 not
 trivial
 that
 they
 do
 exist.)
 The
 same
 holds
 with
 
any
 other
 internal
 question
 having
 purely
 to
 do
 with
 numbers
 (such
 as
 questions
 
about
 relations
 between
 numbers
 or
 sums
 of
 numbers).
 It
 follows
 from
 the
 very
 
adoption
 of
 a
 framework
 with
 mathematical
 language
 that
 numbers
 exist
 (again,
 
in
 a
 way
 that
 is
 consistent
 with
 that
 which
 is
 adopted
 not
 having
 content).
 But
 
when
 asked
 in
 an
 external
 theoretical
 way,
 there
 is
 no
 way
 to
 verify
 an
 answer
 to
 
the
 question
 of
 whether
 numbers
 exist
 and,
 so,
 no
 way
 to
 make
 any
 real
 sense
 of
 
the
 question.
 The
 question
 has
 no
 content
 and
 no
 answer.
 Again,
 the
 only
 sensible
 

  62
 
question
 in
 the
 neighborhood
 is
 whether
 or
 not
 it
 is
 most
 useful
 to
 adopt
 such
 a
 
framework.
 
A
 similar
 (and
 more
 brief
 this
 time)
 story
 can
 be
 given
 about
 Carnap’s
 
view
 of
 properties.
 Property
 talk
 is
 a
 part
 of
 our
 standard
 framework
 and
 seems
 
to
 help
 us
 empirically
 investigate
 the
 world.
 There
 is
 no
 framework
 that
 does
 not
 
have
 property
 terms
 in
 it
 and
 works
 better
 for
 us
 given
 this
 goal.
25

 Some
 property
 
statements
 are
 trivial
 and
 analytic,
 such
 as
 the
 sentence
 ‘properties
 exist’.
 Some
 
follow
 from
 empirical
 evidence
 and
 the
 rules
 of
 the
 language,
 such
 as
 (when
 
pointing
 to
 two
 oranges)
 the
 sentence
 ‘these
 two
 oranges
 have
 a
 property
 in
 
common’.
 That
 sentence
 analytically
 entails
 that
 there
 is
 a
 property
 that
 these
 
oranges
 have
 in
 common.
 
Given
 this
 general
 view,
 it
 seems
 that
 we
 should
 not
 take
 seriously,
 as
 
being
 of
 a
 factual
 nature,
 the
 disputes
 between
 philosophers
 about
 the
 existence
 
of
 the
 external
 world
 or
 numbers.
 What
 we
 should
 probably
 say
 about
 those
 
philosophers
 that
 engage
 in
 such
 disputes
 is
 that
 they
 are
 not
 really
 disagreeing
 
about
 anything
 factual.
 At
 most,
 they
 are
 disagreeing
 about
 the
 practical
 matter
 of
 
whether
 or
 not
 the
 standard
 frameworks
 are
 ones
 that
 should
 be
 adopted,
 given
 
our
 purposes.
 (The
 purposes
 in
 question
 could
 be
 related
 do
 doing
 good
 science
 
or
 achieving
 some
 other
 practical
 goal.
 For
 Carnap,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 the
 correct
 
standard
 to
 measure
 these
 frameworks
 by
 is
 what
 is
 needed
 to
 do
 our
 best
 
science.)
 But,
 really,
 the
 philosophers
 are
 not
 making
 meaningful
 claims
 of
 the
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
25

 This
 is
 an
 assumption
 that
 I
 make
 for
 the
 purpose
 of
 explaining
 Carnap’s
 view
 
and
 how
 he
 accepts
 properties.
 

  63
 
sort
 that
 can
 be
 evaluated
 as
 true
 or
 false
26
.
 And
 since
 they
 are
 not
 making
 such
 
claims,
 they
 cannot
 truly
 be
 said
 to
 engage
 in
 a
 substantive
 dispute.
 
III.
 HIRSCH’S
 VIEW
 
As
 discussed
 in
 a
 previous
 chapter,
 Hirsch’s
27

 view
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 asks
 
us
 to
 imagine
 each
 disputant
 as
 embedded
 in
 linguistic
 communities
 the
 
members
 of
 which
 share
 his
 dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute.
 If,
 when
 
imagined
 as
 such,
 the
 speakers
 do
 not
 mean
 the
 same
 thing
 by
 the
 disputed
 
sentence
 (and
 so
 do
 not
 disagree
 when
 using
 it),
 then
 the
 dispute
 is
 merely
 
verbal.
 
For
 example,
 imagine
 two
 children,
 one
 American
 and
 one
 British,
 arguing
 
over
 the
 truth
 of
 the
 sentence
 ‘football
 is
 played
 with
 a
 round
 ball’.
 One
 has
 in
 
mind
 American
 football
 (because
 that’s
 the
 only
 sense
 of
 ‘football’
 he
 has)
 while
 
the
 other
 has
 in
 mind
 soccer
 (the
 only
 sense
 of
 ‘football’
 that
 she
 has).
 If
 we
 
imagine
 them
 as
 embedded
 in
 two
 different
 linguistic
 communities,
 as
 Hirsch
 
would
 like
 us
 to,
 they
 would
 mean
 two
 different
 things
 by
 the
 sentence
 ‘football
 is
 
played
 with
 a
 round
 ball’
28
.
 Each
 considered
 as
 the
 center
 of
 a
 separate
 linguistic
 
community,
 the
 American
 disagrees
 with
 the
 claim
 that
 American
 football
 is
 
played
 with
 a
 round
 ball
 and
 the
 Briton
 agrees
 with
 the
 claim
 that
 soccer
 is.
 In
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
26

 This
 is
 not
 to
 imply
 that
 all
 meaningful
 claims
 can
 be
 evaluated
 as
 true
 or
 false.
 
Imprecise
 claims
 can
 have
 content
 even
 if
 they
 are
 not
 always
 true
 or
 false.
 
27

 Hirsch
 (2011)
 
28

 It
 is
 a
 nice
 feature
 of
 Hirsch’s
 theory
 that
 it
 captures
 this
 dispute
 whether
 the
 
term
 ‘football’
 means
 something
 different
 in
 the
 mouths
 of
 these
 children
 or
 not.
 
If
 it
 is
 ambiguous
 in
 the
 public
 language
 (which
 is
 probably
 the
 right
 thing
 to
 say),
 
we
 can
 still
 imagine
 each
 child
 in
 his
 own
 community
 and
 they
 mean
 different
 
things
 in
 that
 situation.
 If
 it
 is
 not
 ambiguous,
 then
 they
 mean
 different
 things
 in
 
the
 imagined
 situation.
 Hirsch
 wins
 either
 way.
 

  64
 
other
 words,
 they
 are
 not
 really
 disagreeing
 when
 considered
 in
 this
 way.
 The
 
only
 thing
 generating
 the
 dispute
 is
 their
 differing
 usages
 of
 the
 term
 ‘football’.
 
One
 might
 think
 that
 it
 is
 relevant
 that
 the
 above
 is
 a
 case
 involving
 
ambiguity,
 but
 it
 is
 not
 relevant.
 We
 can
 imagine
 a
 case
 in
 which
 the
 term
 with
 
respect
 to
 which
 the
 disputants
 semantically
 deviate
 is
 unambiguous.
 Consider
 
the
 case
 with
 Jenny
 and
 Jackson
 from
 Chapter
 2.
 It
 is
 a
 dispute
 between
 two
 
people
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 a
 particular
 drinking
 vessel
 made
 of
 glass
 is
 a
 cup.
 
Jenny
 says
 that
 it
 is,
 by
 uttering
 the
 sentence
 ‘The
 drinking
 vessel
 in
 front
 of
 us
 is
 
a
 cup’.
 Jackson
 says
 that
 it
 is
 not,
 by
 denying
 that
 sentence.
 Jackson
 says
 that
 cups
 
cannot
 be
 made
 of
 glass,
 that
 if
 something
 is
 made
 of
 glass
 then
 it
 is
 not
 a
 cup.
 
Jenny
 says
 that
 cups
 can
 most
 certainly
 be
 made
 of
 glass.
 If
 we
 imagine
 each
 as
 
the
 center
 of
 a
 linguistic
 community,
 they
 express
 different
 claims
 by
 the
 
disputed
 sentence
 (and
 other
 sentences
 containing
 the
 term
 ‘cup’).
 Roughly
 
speaking,
 Jenny
 makes
 a
 claim
 about
 all
 cup-­‐like
 objects,
 even
 those
 made
 of
 
glass.
 And
 Jackson
 makes
 a
 claim
 about
 all
 non-­‐glass
 cup-­‐like
 objects.
 These
 
claims
 do
 not
 contradict
 each
 other.
 What
 generates
 the
 dispute
 is
 the
 difference
 
in
 the
 way
 in
 which
 the
 two
 people
 use
 the
 term
 ‘cup’.
 
Above
 are
 everyday,
 non-­‐philosophical
 examples
 of
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes.
 (Or,
 at
 least,
 disputes
 that
 Hirsch’s
 theory
 generates
 as
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes.)
 As
 mentioned
 earlier,
 Hirsch
 thinks
 that
 some
 philosophical
 disputes
 
are
 merely
 verbal
 as
 well.
 An
 example
 of
 a
 dispute
 that
 he
 takes
 to
 be
 merely
 
verbal
 is
 the
 dispute
 about
 the
 existence
 of
 mereological
 sums.
 Consider
 the
 
following
 dispute
 between
 our
 philosopher-­‐friends
 Barkla
 and
 Bross.
 They
 are
 

  65
 
standing
 in
 a
 room
 before
 a
 table.
 The
 table
 has
 two
 plates
 on
 it
 (and
 no
 other
 
non-­‐complex
 objects).
 The
 plates
 are
 separate
 from
 each
 other
 and
 from
 the
 
table.
 (That
 is,
 they
 are
 not
 glued
 to
 each
 other
 or
 the
 table,
 or
 anything
 of
 that
 
sort.)
 Barkla
 says
 that
 there
 are
 merely
 two
 objects
 (the
 two
 plates)
 on
 the
 table.
 
Bross
 disagrees.
 He
 says
 that
 there
 are
 more
 than
 just
 two
 objects.
 There
 are
 
three;
29

 there
 are
 the
 two
 plates
 and
 there
 is
 the
 mereological
 sum
 that
 is
 
composed
 of
 the
 two
 plates.
 According
 to
 Hirsch
 (2008),
 this
 is
 a
 merely
 verbal
 
dispute.
 If
 Barkla
 and
 Bross
 were
 embedded
 in
 their
 own
 linguistic
 communities
 
(in
 the
 way
 described
 above)
 they
 would
 not
 be
 expressing
 contradictory
 
propositions
 when
 assenting
 to
 or
 denying
 the
 sentence
 ‘there
 are
 only
 two
 
objects
 on
 the
 table’.
 On
 Hirsch’s
 view,
 he
 identifies
 the
 quantifier
 as
 that
 which
 
the
 two
 philosophers
 in
 such
 a
 dispute
 are
 using
 differently.
 And
 he
 takes
 it
 to
 be
 
the
 case
 that
 all
 that
 can
 settle
 the
 dispute,
 insofar
 as
 it
 can
 be
 settled,
 is
 which
 
philosopher
 is
 using
 the
 term
 correctly.
 (More
 specifically,
 whichever
 
philosopher
 is
 using
 the
 term
 in
 accordance
 with
 English
 is
 correct.)
 
Now
 that
 we
 have
 something
 of
 a
 grasp
 of
 what
 the
 views
 of
 Carnap
 and
 
Hirsch
 are,
 I
 will
 move
 on
 to
 comparing
 and
 contrasting
 them.
 In
 the
 following
 
section,
 I
 will
 discuss
 the
 main
 ways
 in
 which
 the
 two
 views
 are
 similar.
 In
 section
 
V,
 I
 will
 discuss
 the
 main
 ways
 in
 which
 they
 are
 different.
 

 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
29

 For
 the
 sake
 of
 simplicity,
 I
 am
 restricting
 Barkla’s
 view
 to
 there
 being
 three
 
objects
 on
 the
 table.
 Many,
 if
 not
 most,
 philosophers
 that
 believe
 in
 mereological
 
sums
 would
 say
 that
 there
 are
 many
 more
 than
 three,
 since
 they
 would
 take
 the
 
parts
 of
 the
 plates
 (and
 combinations
 of
 those
 parts)
 to
 be
 objects
 as
 well.
 The
 
essence
 of
 the
 dispute
 is
 captured
 here,
 though.
 

  66
 
IV.
 SIMILARITIES
 BETWEEN
 CARNAP
 AND
 HIRSCH
 
 
One
 might
 wonder
 what,
 at
 the
 end
 of
 the
 day,
 is
 the
 real
 difference
 between
 
these
 views
 of
 Carnap
 and
 Hirsch.
 They
 initially
 seem
 to
 be
 quite
 similar
 in
 
certain
 ways.
 And
 that,
 I
 believe,
 is
 because
 they
 are.
 In
 this
 section
 I
 will
 discuss
 
the
 ways
 in
 which
 the
 views
 are
 similar
 to
 each
 other.
 

  Both
 Carnap’s
 and
 Hirsch’s
 views
 are
 deflationary.
 They
 both
 say
 that
 
certain
 disputes
 that
 seem
 to
 be
 substantial
 are,
 in
 fact,
 less
 substantial
 than
 they
 
seem.
 (This
 is
 not
 to
 say
 that
 they
 agree
 on
 exactly
 which
 philosophical
 disputes
 
are
 less
 substantial
 than
 they
 seem.)
 As
 mentioned
 above,
 Carnap
 says
 that
 
certain
 philosophical
 disputes
 are
 not
 the
 real
 theoretical
 disputes
 that
 they
 seem
 
to
 be.
 They
 are
 pseudo-­‐disputes
 in
 which
 the
 disputants
 are
 not
 making
 
meaningful
 claims.
 Similarly,
 Hirsch
 thinks
 of
 certain
 philosophical
 disputes
 that
 
they
 are
 merely
 verbal
 and
 are
 generated
 by
 people
 using
 terms
 in
 some
 
fundamentally
 different
 way.
 This
 is
 the
 general
 and
 obvious
 way
 in
 which
 the
 
views
 are
 similar.
 However,
 they
 are
 similar
 in
 a
 more
 specific
 way,
 as
 well.
 

  Both
 Carnap
 and
 Hirsch
 rely,
 broadly
 speaking,
 on
 different
 languages
 (or
 
linguistic
 frameworks)
 in
 which
 some
 disputed
 sentence
 of
 a
 suspect
 dispute
 
comes
 out
 as
 true
 or
 not
 true.
 For
 instance,
 Carnap
 says
 that
 a
 sentence
 like
 ‘there
 
is
 a
 number
 greater
 than
 100’
 comes
 out
 as
 trivially
 true
 in
 any
 framework
 
according
 to
 which
 the
 sentence
 ‘there
 are
 numbers
 that
 are
 greater
 than
 100’
 
comes
 out
 as
 true.
 (These
 would,
 presumably,
 be
 any
 frameworks
 that
 use
 
numerals
 designating
 numbers
 greater
 than
 100.)
 Let
 us
 consider
 a
 possible
 
example
 to
 make
 things
 clearer.
 
 

  67
 
Consider
 two
 speakers
 operating
 from
 within
 different
 frameworks.
 
Person
 A
 operates
 from
 within
 a
 framework
 in
 which
 the
 numbers
 go
 above
 100.
 
Person
 B
 operates
 from
 within
 a
 framework
 in
 which
 the
 numbers
 do
 not
 go
 
above
 100.
 Let
 us
 also
 assume
 that
 everything
 else
 about
 their
 respective
 
linguistic
 frameworks
 is
 the
 same.
 The
 only
 difference
 is
 with
 respect
 to
 their
 
mathematical
 language.
 Assume
 that
 each
 is
 competent
 with
 the
 terms
 in
 his
 
linguistic
 framework.
 For
 person
 A,
 the
 question
 asked
 using
 the
 sentence
 ‘is
 
there
 a
 number
 greater
 than
 100?’
 is,
 trivially,
 that
 there
 is.
 For
 person
 B
 the
 
answer
 to
 the
 question
 expressed
 by
 that
 same
 sentence
 is,
 trivially,
 that
 there
 is
 
not.
 If
 person
 A
 and
 person
 B
 get
 into
 a
 dispute
 over
 the
 sentence
 ‘there
 is
 a
 
number
 greater
 than
 100’,
 they
 do
 not
 disagree
 about
 any
 theoretical
 facts
 about
 
numbers.
 If
 they
 are
 both
 treating
 the
 question
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 such
 a
 number
 
exists
 as
 an
 internal
 question
 (let
 us
 assume
 they
 are
 somehow
 unaware
 of
 the
 
fact
 that
 they
 are
 operating
 from
 within
 different
 frameworks),
 then
 what
 they
 
are
 each
 saying
 is
 trivially
 true
 in
 their
 own
 framework.
 If
 they
 are
 treating
 it
 as
 a
 
deeper,
 philosophical
 question,
 then
 their
 sentences
 fall
 flat.
 They
 express
 
nothing
 of
 meaning,
 due
 to
 the
 fact
 that
 they
 are
 being
 used
 in
 a
 way
 that
 is
 not
 in
 
accordance
 with
 the
 rules
 of
 either
 framework.
 At
 best,
 we
 can
 consider
 person
 A
 
and
 person
 B
 as
 disagreeing
 about
 the
 practical
 question
 of
 which
 framework
 is
 
better
 to
 use.
 This,
 as
 mentioned
 before,
 is
 something
 that
 might
 be
 settled
 by
 
reference
 to
 which
 framework
 works
 better
 for
 doing
 our
 best
 science.
 (How
 it
 is
 
best
 decided
 is
 less
 important
 here
 than
 the
 fact
 that
 I
 might
 be
 decided
 by
 
reference
 to
 some
 practical
 goal.)
 

  68
 
This
 situation
 feels
 quite
 similar
 to
 one
 with
 the
 plates
 on
 the
 table
 from
 
the
 previous
 section.
 Imagining
 Barkla
 and
 Bross
 in
 the
 situations
 that
 Hirsch
 
asks
 us
 to
 imagine
 them,
 we
 have
 two
 speakers
 speaking
 different
 languages.
 The
 
sentence
 under
 dispute
 ‘there
 are
 only
 two
 objects
 on
 the
 table’
 expresses
 a
 
trivial
 truth
 in
 the
 language
 of
 Barkla
 and
 expresses
 a
 trivial
 falsehood
 in
 the
 
language
 of
 Bross.
 There
 may
 be,
 as
 Hirsch
 says,
 some
 actual
 linguistic
 facts
 that
 
settle
 the
 dispute.
 And
 this
 is
 analogous,
 it
 seems,
 to
 the
 only
 sense
 in
 which
 the
 
dispute
 between
 person
 A
 and
 person
 B
 can
 be
 settled.
 There
 is
 an
 obvious
 sense,
 
in
 both
 cases,
 in
 which
 the
 disputants
 are
 missing
 each
 other.
 They
 are
 not
 
speaking
 the
 same
 language
 in
 some
 sense.
 (Even
 though,
 in
 the
 case
 of
 Barkla
 and
 
Bross,
 they
 are
 speaking
 the
 same
 public
 language.)
 
Carnap
 focuses
 his
 view
 of
 pseudo-­‐disputes
 on
 cases
 of
 ontological
 
disputes.
 But
 one
 might
 think
 that
 his
 general
 system
 can
 be
 used
 to
 give
 a
 
somewhat
 plausible
 explanation
 for
 what
 happens
 in
 other
 types
 of
 disputes.
 
Matti
 Eklund
 (2008)
30

 applies
 Carnap’s
 way
 of
 thinking
 of
 ontological
 disputes
 to
 
a
 non-­‐ontological
 dispute
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 tomato
 is
 a
 fruit.
 He
 does
 this
 
by
 identifying
 the
 three
 Carnapian
 ways
 in
 which
 a
 dispute
 over
 the
 English
 
sentence
 ‘the
 tomato
 is
 a
 fruit’
 can
 be
 a
 dispute
 (or
 pseudo-­‐dispute).
 It
 can
 be
 an
 
internal
 dispute,
 considered
 as
 a
 dispute
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 sentence
 comes
 
out
 true
 in
 English
 (given
 the
 rules
 of
 the
 language
 and,
 perhaps,
 the
 relevant
 
empirical
 data
 about
 tomatoes
 and
 fruit).
 Or,
 the
 dispute
 can
 be
 an
 external
 
pragmatic
 dispute
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 we
 should
 (given
 our
 purposes)
 adopt
 a
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
30

 “Carnap
 and
 Ontological
 Pluralism,”
 p.
 5.
 

  69
 
framework
 according
 to
 which
 the
 sentence
 ‘the
 tomato
 is
 a
 fruit’
 comes
 out
 true.
 
Finally,
 it
 could
 be
 seen
 as
 an
 external
 theoretical
 dispute,
 in
 which
 the
 disputants
 
are
 arguing
 not
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 sentence
 comes
 out
 as
 true
 in
 English
 or
 
if
 some
 framework
 or
 the
 other
 is
 more
 pragmatically
 useful.
 They
 are
 arguing
 
about
 whether,
 independent
 of
 those
 concerns,
 tomatoes
 really
 are
 fruit.
 And
 this
 
seems
 (in
 a
 way
 that
 is
 consistent
 with
 Carnap’s
 view
 of
 this
 option’s
 analog
 with
 
respect
 to
 ontological
 disputes)
 to
 not
 really
 be
 a
 dispute
 at
 all.
 It
 is
 not
 very
 clear
 
at
 all
 what
 the
 question
 really
 amounts
 to.
 This
 apparent
 dispute
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 
pseudo-­‐dispute.
 
 
It
 seems
 that
 a
 similar
 sort
 of
 thing
 can
 be
 done
 with
 our
 previous
 
examples
 such
 as
 the
 one
 between
 Jane
 and
 Joe
 in
 the
 last
 section.
 Instead
 of
 
imagining
 these
 two
 in
 their
 own
 linguistic
 communities,
 let
 us
 consider
 the
 idea
 
that
 they
 operate
 from
 within
 different
 frameworks.
 (This
 is
 a
 slightly
 different
 
way
 of
 thinking
 of
 the
 internal
 version
 of
 this
 dispute
 than
 the
 version
 in
 the
 
previous
 paragraph.
 The
 internal
 dispute
 can
 be
 had,
 it
 seems,
 between
 two
 
speakers
 from
 within
 the
 same
 framework
 or
 in
 different
 frameworks.
 In
 the
 case
 
of
 the
 former,
 the
 rules
 of
 the
 shared
 framework
 settle
 the
 dispute.
 In
 the
 case
 of
 
the
 latter,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 both
 speakers
 are
 correct
 in
 their
 own
 frameworks.)
 
According
 to
 the
 rules
 of
 Jane’s
 framework,
 if
 a
 drinking
 vessel
 is
 made
 of
 glass,
 
then
 it
 is
 not
 a
 cup.
 According
 to
 the
 rules
 of
 Joe’s
 framework,
 if
 a
 drinking
 vessel
 
is
 made
 of
 glass,
 it
 can
 be
 a
 cup.
 Each
 says
 something
 trivially
 true,
 from
 within
 
their
 own
 framework
 when
 Jane
 says
 that
 the
 glass
 vessel
 before
 them
 is
 not
 a
 
cup
 or
 when
 Joe
 says
 that
 it
 is
 a
 cup.
 Or,
 perhaps,
 they
 are
 arguing
 over
 the
 

  70
 
pragmatic
 question
 of
 which
 framework
 is
 more
 useful,
 the
 one
 according
 to
 
which
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 glass
 or
 the
 one
 according
 to
 which
 they
 cannot
 be
 
made
 of
 glass.
 And
 if
 they
 get
 into
 a
 ‘deeper’
 sort
 of
 dispute,
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 
the
 object
 is
 really
 a
 cup,
 then
 they
 are
 engaged
 in
 a
 meaningless
 pseudo-­‐dispute.
 
 
Furthermore,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 a
 similar
 story
 can
 be
 told
 with
 respect
 to
 
the
 example
 in
 the
 previous
 section
 concerning
 the
 American
 and
 the
 Briton
 
debating
 over
 football.
 The
 claim
 here
 is
 not
 that
 this
 is
 how
 Carnap
 intended
 his
 
theory
 to
 be
 used.
 It
 is
 merely
 that
 this
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 plausible
 and
 natural
 
extension
 of
 his
 theory.
 And
 this
 extension
 of
 his
 theory
 gives
 a
 plausible
 (even
 if
 
incorrect)
 account
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 Given
 the
 fact
 that
 Carnap’s
 view
 
can
 plausibly
 fit
 these
 other
 sorts
 of
 disputes,
 it
 seems
 even
 more
 similar
 to
 
Hirsch’s
 view,
 which
 practically
 seems
 built
 for
 these
 cases.
 
These
 are
 the
 main
 similarities
 between
 the
 views
 of
 Carnap
 and
 Hirsch.
 
To
 review,
 the
 two
 main
 similarities
 are
 (i)
 each
 of
 the
 views
 says
 that
 there
 is
 a
 
sense
 in
 which
 the
 disputants
 (in
 these
 sorts
 of
 pseudo
 or
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes)
 are
 speaking
 different
 languages.
 And
 each
 says
 that,
 given
 the
 different
 
languages
 (or
 frameworks),
 the
 sides
 that
 are
 taken
 by
 the
 different
 disputants
 
are
 trivially
 correct
 (in
 some
 sense).
 Lastly,
 each
 of
 the
 views
 takes
 there
 to
 be
 
some
 sort
 of
 substantive
 dispute
 happening
 alongside
 these
 pseudo
 or
 merely
 
verbal
 disputes.
 With
 Carnap
 the
 substantive
 dispute
 is
 a
 practical
 one
 about
 
which
 framework
 to
 adopt.
 With
 Hirsch
 the
 substantive
 dispute
 is
 a
 semantic
 one
 
about
 which
 disputant
 (if
 either)
 is
 speaking
 the
 public
 language
 correctly.
 

 

  71
 
V.
 DIFFERENCES
 BETWEEN
 CARNAP
 AND
 HIRSCH
 
In
 this
 section
 I
 will
 discus
 the
 differences
 between
 Carnap’s
 view
 and
 the
 view
 of
 
Hirsch.
 While
 the
 views
 are
 similar
 in
 the
 ways
 discussed
 in
 the
 previous
 section,
 
they
 have
 clear
 and
 important
 differences.
 

  The
 first
 and
 possibly
 most
 important
 difference
 between
 the
 two
 views
 is
 
that
 Carnap
 thinks
 that
 pseudo-­‐disputes
 are
 without
 content,
 with
 respect
 to
 the
 
theoretical
 questions
 around
 which
 they
 center.
 Two
 philosophers
 arguing
 about
 
the
 existence
 of
 numbers
 are
 not
 saying
 anything
 of
 meaning
 when
 one
 uses
 the
 
sentence
 ‘numbers
 exist’
 and
 the
 other
 uses
 the
 sentence
 ‘numbers
 do
 not
 exist’.
 
While
 it
 may
 be
 reasonable
 to
 attribute
 different
 views
 to
 these
 two
 philosophers
 
about
 which
 framework
 is
 better,
 given
 their
 positions
 in
 the
 seemingly
 
theoretical
 dispute,
 that
 does
 not
 give
 the
 sentences
 above,
 as
 used
 by
 them,
 
meaning.
 

  On
 the
 other
 hand,
 Hirsch
 thinks
 that
 the
 disputed
 sentences
 in
 merely
 
verbal
 disputes
 can,
 and
 often
 do,
 have
 meaning.
 Taking
 the
 case
 from
 section
 III
 
with
 the
 two
 plates
 on
 the
 table,
 Hirsch’s
 view
 says
 that
 the
 disputed
 sentence
 
‘there
 are
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 the
 table’
 means
 that
 there
 are
 merely
 two
 
objects
 on
 the
 table.
 Barkla
 and
 Bross
 express
 contradictory
 propositions
 when
 
Barkla
 says
 that
 there
 are
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 the
 table
 (by
 sincerely
 uttering
 
the
 sentence
 ‘there
 are
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 the
 table’)
 and
 Bross
 disagrees
 by
 
saying
 that
 there
 are
 not
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 the
 table
 (by
 sincerely
 uttering
 
the
 sentence
 ‘there
 are
 not
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 the
 table’).
 Hirch’s
 view
 
captures
 our
 strong
 intuition
 that
 when
 two
 philosophers
 seem
 to
 disagree
 about
 

  72
 
whether
 or
 not
 there
 are
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 some
 table
 (in
 the
 manner
 in
 
which
 Barkla
 and
 Bross
 do)
 there
 is
 a
 very
 real
 sense
 in
 which
 they
 are
 actually
 
disagreeing
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 there
 are
 merely
 two
 objects
 on
 some
 table.
 
This
 stands
 in
 stark
 contrast
 to
 Carnap’s
 claim
 that
 when
 two
 philosophers
 
engage
 in
 an
 ontological
 dispute
 such
 as
 the
 one
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 numbers
 
exist,
 they
 do
 no
 really
 disagree
 about
 anything
 theoretical
 (and
 the
 sentences
 
that
 they
 sincerely
 utter
 do
 not
 express
 contradictory
 claims).
 

  While
 there
 is
 some
 sense
 in
 which
 both
 views
 have
 the
 disputants
 in
 
pseudo
 or
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 speaking
 different
 languages,
 the
 different
 
ways
 in
 which
 each
 view
 characterizes
 the
 sense
 in
 which
 this
 happens
 is
 
importantly
 different.
 It
 is
 the
 difference
 between
 actually
 different
 linguistic
 
frameworks
 (Carnap)
 and
 imagined
 different
 linguistic
 communities
 (Hirsch).
 
This
 ties
 into
 the
 issue
 mentioned
 in
 the
 previous
 paragraph
 of
 Hirsch
 having
 the
 
resources
 to
 account
 for
 our
 intuition
 that
 the
 disputes
 he
 calls
 merely
 verbal
 are
 
substantive
 in
 some
 way.
 Given
 that
 the
 mechanism
 by
 which
 he
 characterizes
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes
 has
 us
 imagine
 what
 the
 disputants
 would
 mean
 when
 
centers
 of
 their
 own
 linguistic
 communities,
 he
 leaves
 the
 public
 meaning
 of
 the
 
terms
 alone.
 The
 terms
 of
 the
 disputed
 sentence(s)
 mean
 what
 they
 mean
 in
 the
 
public
 language
 and,
 insofar
 as
 they
 are
 not
 ambiguous
 in
 some
 way
 that
 
generates
 the
 dispute,
 this
 allows
 the
 disputants
 to
 actually
 theoretically
 
disagree.
 

   
  The
 aspect
 of
 each
 theory
 that
 accounts
 for
 the
 trivialness
 of
 the
 claims
 of
 
each
 disputant
 (see
 section
 IV)
 seems
 to
 be
 different.
 In
 Carnap,
 as
 his
 theory
 is
 

  73
 
stated
 by
 him
31
,
 it
 is
 the
 rules
 of
 the
 language
 and
 analyticity
 that
 help
 explain
 
why
 at
 least
 some
 internal
 questions
 are
 trivially
32

 true
 (or
 false).
 For
 him,
 the
 
sentence
 ‘there
 is
 a
 number
 greater
 than
 100’
 is
 analytically
 true
 when
 viewed
 as
 
a
 statement
 made
 within
 the
 rules
 of
 the
 framework.
 On
 the
 other
 hand,
 the
 
trivialness
 of
 ontological
 claims
 according
 to
 Hirsch
 seems
 to
 be
 generated
 by
 a
 
different
 source.
 
One
 way
 to
 characterize
 what
 generates
 the
 trivialness
 of
 the
 claims
 in
 
Hirsch’s
 imagined
 languages
 is
 that
 the
 disputants
 treat
 the
 sentences
 that
 they
 
take
 to
 be
 true
 in
 a
 meaning-­‐constitutive
 way
33
.
 For
 instance,
 one
 might
 think
 
that
 Joe
 and
 Jane
 from
 section
 III
 have
 a
 practical
 disagreement
 with
 respect
 to
 
how
 they
 treat
 the
 sentence
 ‘cups
 cannot
 be
 made
 of
 glass’.
 Joe
 does
 not
 treat
 this
 
sentence
 in
 a
 meaning-­‐constitutive
 way.
 Jane
 does.
 This
 does
 not
 mean
 that
 Jane
 
believes
 the
 sentence
 to
 follow
 from
 the
 meaning.
 Rather,
 it
 means
 that
 she
 treats
 
the
 sentence
 in
 the
 way
 that
 a
 linguistic
 community
 would
 need
 to
 in
 order
 for
 a
 
sentence
 to
 be
 meaning-­‐constitutive.
 This
 is
 important
 to
 note,
 given
 a
 possibly
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
31

 The
 purpose
 of
 this
 chapter
 is
 to
 distinguish
 Carnap’s
 view,
 as
 stated
 by
 him,
 
from
 Hirsch’s
 view.
 Carnap
 relies
 on
 analyticity
 to
 build
 his
 theory
 of
 
philosophical
 pseudo-­‐disputes.
 Soames
 (2008)
 argues
 that
 he
 does
 not
 
necessarily
 need
 to
 do
 this.
 His
 view
 can
 be
 revised,
 taking
 on
 certain
 Quinean
 
commitments
 and
 remain
 essentially
 the
 same,
 but
 without
 a
 reliance
 on
 his
 
ambitious
 version
 of
 analyticity.
 However,
 it
 still
 seems
 worth
 noting
 that
 
Carnap’s
 stated
 view
 is
 different
 than
 Hirsch’s
 in
 its
 reliance
 on
 this
 version
 of
 
analyticity.
 
32

 I
 say
 ‘at
 least
 some’
 here
 due
 to
 the
 fact
 that
 it
 seem
 as
 though
 it
 might
 be
 that
 
there
 are
 internal
 questions
 that
 are
 quite
 difficult
 to
 answer,
 given
 certain
 
complex
 calculations
 that
 would
 need
 to
 be
 made.
 It
 feels
 not
 quite
 right
 to
 call
 
those
 truths
 trivial.
 But
 perhaps
 I
 am
 missing
 something
 here.
 
33

 I
 need
 to
 get
 clearer
 about
 what
 it
 is
 exactly
 to
 treat
 a
 sentence
 in
 a
 meaning-­‐
constitutive
 way.
 This
 notion
 might
 end
 up
 playing
 a
 role
 in
 what
 I
 take
 to
 be
 the
 
best
 characterization
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 (one
 that
 is
 not
 identical
 to
 
Hirsch’s
 or
 Manley’s
 modification
 of
 Hirsch’s
 view).
 

  74
 
understandable
 concern
 that
 the
 notion
 of
 meaning-­‐constitutiveness
 is
 too
 
intimately
 tied
 up
 with
 analyticity
 for
 this
 aspect
 of
 Hirsch’s
 view
 to
 count
 as
 a
 
way
 in
 which
 the
 view
 is
 different
 from
 Carnap’s
 view.
 Perhaps
 for
 a
 sentence
 to
 
be
 meaning-­‐constitutive,
 it
 must
 be
 analytic.
 Or
 perhaps
 the
 notion
 of
 meaning-­‐
constitutiveness
 is
 defined
 with
 respect
 to
 analyticity
 in
 some
 other
 way.
 In
 
either
 case,
 this
 worry
 seems
 unfounded.
 My
 claim
 here
 is
 not
 that
 Hirsch’s
 view
 
relies
 on
 there
 being
 sentences
 that
 are
 in
 fact
 meaning-­‐constitutive.
 Rather,
 the
 
claim
 is
 that
 his
 view
 perhaps
 relies
 on
 the
 idea
 that
 speakers
 treat
 certain
 
sentences
 (the
 ones
 under
 dispute)
 in
 a
 particular
 way
 that
 might,
 given
 enough
 
people
 doing
 it,
 make
 the
 sentences
 meaning-­‐constitutive.
 This
 is
 consistent
 with
 
the
 claim
 that
 there
 are
 not
 enough
 people
 treating
 any
 sentence
 in
 this
 way
 to
 
make
 any
 sentence
 actually
 meaning-­‐constitutive.
 It
 is
 the
 way
 in
 which
 they
 
treat
 the
 sentences
 that
 is
 important,
 not
 anything
 intrinsic
 to
 the
 nature
 of
 the
 
sentence
 (or
 its
 meaning)
 itself.
 
VI.
 WHY
 HIRSCH’S
 VIEW
 IS
 BETTER
 
Hirsch’s
 view
 is
 better
 than
 Carnap’s
 for
 multiple
 reasons.
 First,
 it
 captures
 an
 
intuitive
 and
 ordinary
 phenomenon,
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 This
 is
 a
 kind
 of
 
dispute
 that
 is
 not
 controversial
 in
 terms
 of
 its
 existence.
 We
 all
 accept
 that
 
merely
 verbal
 disputes
 happen
 in
 some
 cases.
 Hirsch
 is
 merely
 claiming
 that
 the
 
class
 of
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 is
 somewhat
 larger,
 and
 contains
 much
 more
 
subtle
 examples,
 than
 we
 might
 initially
 think.
 It
 covers
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 of
 
all
 kinds,
 from
 the
 everyday
 ‘football’
 type
 of
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 to
 the
 more
 
subtle
 examples
 that
 exist
 in
 philosophy.
 
 

  75
 
Carnap-­‐style
 pseudo-­‐disputes,
 on
 the
 other
 hand,
 have
 no
 ordinary
 and
 
uncontroversial
 examples.
 If
 they
 happen,
 it
 is
 news
 to
 the
 world
 in
 general,
 
philosophers
 and
 non-­‐philosophers
 alike.
 While
 it
 is
 true
 that
 Hirsch
 accuses
 
philosophers
 of
 unknowingly
 engaging
 in
 disputes
 that
 are
 merely
 verbal,
 it
 
seems
 as
 though
 he
 is
 more
 generous
 to
 philosophers
 than
 is
 Carnap.
 And
 this
 
seems
 like
 a
 good
 thing.
 The
 claim
 that
 philosophers,
 who
 pay
 very
 close
 
attention
 to
 what
 they
 say
 and
 what
 they
 mean,
 routinely
 get
 into
 disputes
 in
 
which
 they
 say
 nothing
 of
 meaning,
 seems
 quite
 implausible
 on
 the
 face
 of
 things.
 
And
 while
 Hirsch
 makes
 a
 claim
 that
 philosophers
 do
 not
 always
 understand
 that
 
they
 are
 engaging
 in
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute,
 the
 level
 of
 subtlety
 that
 his
 merely
 
verbal
 disputes
 can
 exhibit
 and
 the
 fact
 that
 they
 are
 consistent
 with
 the
 
philosophers
 expressing
 contradictory
 claims
 (as
 we
 intuitively
 take
 them
 to
 in
 
the
 first
 place)
 puts
 him
 in
 a
 better
 position
 than
 Carnap.
 
Lastly,
 Carnap
 builds
 currently
 controversial
 views
 about
 verificationism
 
and
 analyticity
 into
 his
 theory.
 Insofar
 as
 these
 are
 vulnerable
 to
 attack
 in
 
contemporary
 philosophy,
 they
 serve
 as
 weaknesses
 of
 his
 view.
 It
 seems
 as
 
though
 verificationism,
 at
 the
 very
 least,
 is
 a
 theory-­‐killer
 in
 contemporary
 
philosophy.
 If
 a
 theory
 is
 built
 on
 verificationism,
 it
 does
 not
 have
 a
 firm
 
foundation
 and
 is
 vulnerable
 to
 a
 possibly
 devastating
 attack.
 Analyticity
 is
 
possibly
 a
 trickier
 matter.
 The
 version
 of
 analyticity
 that
 Carnap
 accepts
 is
 a
 
stronger
 version
 than
 what
 is
 accepted
 by
 fans
 of
 analyticity
 today.
 And
 insofar
 as
 
we
 are
 comparing
 Carnap’s
 views
 as
 stated
 by
 him
 to
 that
 of
 Hirsch,
 it
 seems
 this
 
fact
 leaves
 the
 former
 vulnerable
 in
 a
 way
 that
 he
 latter
 is
 not.
 Hirsch
 is
 not
 

  76
 
committed
 to
 verificationism
 or
 the
 strong
 version
 of
 analyticity
 that
 Carnap
 
likes.
 Any
 attack
 on
 either
 verificationism
 or
 this
 version
 analyticity
 will
 strike
 a
 
blow
 to
 Carnap
 but
 will
 miss
 Hirsch
 completely.
 Thus,
 Hirsch’s
 view
 is
 better.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  77
 
CHAPTER
 4
 –
 
I.
 INTRODUCTION
 
In
 this
 chapter
 I
 will
 focus
 primarily
 on
 arguments
 against
 the
 view
 that
 
ontological
 disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 Ontological
 disputes,
 such
 as
 the
 dispute
 
over
 whether
 there
 exist
 mereological
 sums,
 are
 generally
 thought
 to
 be
 the
 best
 
candidates
 for
 merely
 verbal
 disputes.
 As
 discussed
 in
 chapter
 3,
 Eli
 Hirsch
 is
 a
 
main
 proponent
 of
 diagnosing
 such
 disputes
 as
 merely
 verbal.
 
First,
 I
 will
 give
 a
 brief
 recap
 of
 Hirsch’s
 view.
 Then
 I
 will
 focus
 on
 Matti
 
Eklund’s
 arguments
 against
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 and
 some
 
responses
 to
 those
 arguments.
 Second,
 I
 will
 focus
 on
 Mark
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 
against
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes.
 I
 end
 up
 deciding
 that
 
Eklund’s
 arguments
 can
 be
 avoided
 by
 mere
 verbalists.
 Balaguer’s
 argument,
 
however,
 cannot.
 
II.
 HIRSCH
 RECAP
 
Before
 going
 into
 Eklund
 and
 Balaguer’s
 arguments
 against
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 
ontological
 disputes,
 it
 seems
 worthwhile
 to
 give
 a
 brief
 recap
 of
 Hirsch’s
 view,
 
given
 that
 he
 is
 the
 main
 proponent
 of
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 
disputes.
 Hirsch
 takes
 ontological
 disputes
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 He
 believes
 that
 
there
 are
 different
 senses
 of
 the
 term
 ‘exist’
 that
 are
 available
 to
 us,
 in
 some
 
sense.
 (At
 the
 very
 least,
 he
 thinks
 that
 they
 are
 available
 to
 different
 languages,
 
even
 if
 our
 language
 only
 employs
 one.)
 So,
 when
 two
 philosophers
 disagree
 over
 
whether
 mereological
 sums
 exist
 (for
 instance),
 Hirsch
 interprets
 them
 as
 both
 
saying
 something
 true
 in
 her
 own
 language.
 One
 uses
 a
 sense
 of
 ‘exist’
 that
 allows
 

  78
 
for
 mereological
 sums
 and
 the
 other
 uses
 a
 sense
 that
 does
 not.
 Thus,
 they
 do
 not
 
really
 disagree
 in
 some
 sense,
 since
 on
 some
 level
 they
 are
 not
 expressing
 
contradictory
 propositions
 when
 they
 utter
 the
 sentences
 that
 make
 up
 the
 
dispute.
 Another
 way
 to
 put
 this
 is
 to
 say
 that
 Hirsch
 believes
 there
 are
 multiple
 
quantifiers
 that
 are
 possible
 for
 languages
 to
 use.
 It
 is
 his
 view
 that
 philosophers
 
engaging
 in
 disputes
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 there
 are
 mereological
 sums
 are
 using
 
different
 quantifiers.
 He
 thinks
 that
 were
 philosophers
 to
 agree
 on
 one
 quantifier,
 
then
 they
 would
 not
 disagree
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 mereological
 sums
 exist.
 If
 
they
 chose
 to
 use
 a
 more
 restrictive
 quantifier,
 one
 that
 allowed
 fewer
 objects
 in,
 
then
 the
 philosophers
 could
 agree
 that
 mereological
 sums
 do
 not
 exist.
 And
 he
 
thinks
 that
 if
 philosophers
 were
 to
 use
 a
 quantifier
 that
 is
 less
 restrictive,
 one
 
that
 allowed
 more
 objects
 in,
 then
 they
 could
 agree
 that
 mereological
 sums
 do
 
exist.
 (Of
 course,
 I
 am
 speaking
 somewhat
 loosely
 here.
 A
 quantifier
 being
 more
 
or
 less
 restrictive
 is
 not
 always
 going
 to
 affect
 whether
 or
 not
 it
 is
 accurate
 to
 say
 
that
 mereological
 sums
 exist.
 It
 might
 be
 the
 quantifier
 is
 allowing
 some
 other
 
type
 of
 object
 in
 (or
 not
 letting
 it
 in).
 But
 the
 reader
 should
 interpret
 me
 in
 the
 
above
 passage
 as
 speaking
 about
 restrictiveness
 of
 the
 quantifier
 with
 respect
 to
 
mereological
 sums.)
 
In
 order
 to
 accommodate
 externalist
 concerns,
 Hirsch
 (and
 Manley)
 give
 
us
 a
 way
 to
 think
 about
 the
 language
 of
 each
 disputant
 without
 claiming
 that
 the
 
disputants
 do
 not
 speak
 the
 same
 language
 at
 all.
 He
 asks
 us
 to
 imagine
 each
 
disputant
 as
 the
 semantic
 base
 of
 her
 own
 community.
 He
 believes
 that
 when
 two
 
philosophers
 disagree
 about
 the
 existence
 of
 mereological
 sums,
 each
 is
 using
 her
 

  79
 
terms
 in
 a
 way
 such
 that
 what
 she
 says
 would
 be
 true
 were
 she
 embedded
 in
 a
 
linguistic
 community
 that
 speaks
 exactly
 like
 her.
 This
 leaves
 open
 the
 question
 
of
 which
 philosopher,
 if
 either,
 speaks
 truly
 in
 the
 relevant
 public
 language
 that
 
they
 are
 using
 in
 the
 dispute.
 
Keeping
 that
 brief
 recap
 of
 Hirsch’s
 general
 conception
 of
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes
 about
 ontology,
 let’s
 move
 into
 Eklund’s
 arguments
 that
 Hirsch’s
 view
 is
 
incorrect
 and
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 
III.
 EKLUND’S
 ARGUMENTS
 AGAINST
 ONTOLOGICAL
 MERE
 VERBALISM
 
Matti
 Eklund
 has
 two
 arguments
 for
 his
 view
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 not
 
merely
 verbal.
 He
 calls
 one
 of
 them
 the
 semantic
 argument.
34

 This
 argument
 is
 
intended
 to
 apply
 to
 many
 (maybe
 all)
 ontological
 disputes.
 For
 the
 purposes
 of
 
this
 chapter,
 I
 will
 focus
 on
 one
 of
 the
 examples
 that
 Eklund
 uses
 when
 making
 
this
 argument.
 Eklund
 is
 addressing
 what
 he
 calls
 ontological
 pluralists.
 His
 
stated
 opponents
 are
 Carnap,
 Putnam,
 and
 Hirsch.
 For
 my
 purposes,
 I
 will
 focus
 
on
 the
 argument
 as
 it
 pertains
 to
 Hirsch’s
 view
 that
 there
 are
 different
 senses
 of
 
existence
 and
 that
 the
 use
 of
 these
 different
 senses
 generates
 merely
 verbal
 
disputes
 about
 ontology.
 

  To
 get
 us
 started,
 Eklund
 asks
 us
 to
 consider
 incars.
 An
 incar
 is
 a
 car
 that
 
has
 the
 property
 of
 being
 inside
 a
 garage
 as
 an
 essential
 property.
 If
 the
 car
 is
 
taken
 outside,
 then
 the
 corresponding
 incar
 no
 longer
 exists.
 So,
 let
 the
 name
 
‘Herbie’
 refer
 to
 some
 white
 car
 that
 happens
 to
 be
 inside.
 And
 let
 the
 name
 
‘Herbie*’
 refer
 to
 the
 corresponding
 incar
 (if
 there
 really
 are
 such
 things
 as
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
34

 Eklund
 (2008)
 “The
 Picture
 of
 Reality
 as
 an
 Amorphous
 Lump”
 
 

  80
 
incars).
 Imagine
 two
 philosophers,
 Olaf
 and
 Manny,
 having
 a
 dispute
 about
 the
 
existence
 of
 incars.
 Specifically,
 they
 disagree
 over
 the
 truth
 of
 
(H)
 Herbie*
 is
 white
 
Olaf
 believes
 that
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 false
 because,
 in
 his
 view,
 the
 singular
 term
 in
 
the
 sentence
 does
 not
 refer.
 Manny
 believes
 it
 is
 true.
 According
 to
 Eklund,
 the
 
Hirschian
 analysis
 of
 this
 dispute
 would
 go
 as
 follows.
 There
 are
 two
 languages,
 L
 
and
 L*.
 Olaf
 speaks
 language
 L.
 Manny
 speaks
 language
 L*.
 In
 language
 L,
 
sentence
 (H)
 is
 false.
 In
 language
 L*,
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 true.
 Each
 philosopher
 
speaks
 truly
 in
 his
 own
 language.
 Thus,
 there
 is
 no
 real
 disagreement
 between
 
them.
 Eklund
 takes
 this
 to
 be
 a
 flawed
 analysis
 of
 the
 dispute.
 In
 fact,
 he
 thinks
 
that
 it
 is
 impossible
 for
 sentence
 (H)
 to
 be
 true
 in
 language
 L*,
 but
 false
 in
 
language
 L.
 His
 argument
 for
 this
 position
 goes
 as
 follows:
 
(1) For
 a
 sentence
 of
 the
 form
 ‘F(a)’,
 of
 any
 language,
 to
 be
 true,
 the
 singular
 
term
 ‘a’
 must
 refer.
 
(2)  
 Hirsch
 says
 that
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 true
 in
 language
 L*.
 
(3) But
 that
 would
 mean
 that
 the
 term
 ‘Herbie*’
 refers.
 
(4) If
 the
 term
 ‘Herbie*’
 refers,
 then
 Herbie*
 exists.
 
Therefore,
 
(5) Sentence
 (H)
 cannot
 be
 false
 in
 language
 L
 (or
 the
 relevant
 augmented
 
version
 of
 language
 L,
 i.e.,
 L
 supplemented
 with
 the
 term
 ‘Herbie*’.).
 
Therefore,
 
(6) Hirsch’s
 view
 leads
 to
 the
 conclusion
 that
 incars
 exist
 and
 Olaf
 is
 mistaken.
 
 

  81
 
According
 to
 Eklund,
 the
 above
 argument
 will
 work
 for
 many
 (or
 all)
 ontological
 
disputes
 that
 Hirsch
 might
 want
 to
 diagnose
 as
 merely
 verbal.
 And
 it
 will
 always
 
lead
 to
 the
 conclusion
 that
 the
 maximal
 ontology,
 in
 the
 given
 dispute,
 is
 the
 
correct
 ontology.
 
Here
 is
 another
 version
 of
 that
 same
 argument
 that
 Eklund
 calls
 the
 
proposition
 argument
 (2009,
 p.
 146):
 
(i) Propositions
 exist
 independently
 of
 how
 we
 choose
 to
 speak.
 
(ii) So
 the
 proposition
 expressed
 by
 sentence
 (H)
 in
 the
 language
 L*
 exists
 
whether
 anyone
 speaks
 L*.
 
(iii)  
 If
 Hirsch’s
 analysis
 is
 correct,
 then
 the
 proposition
 expressed
 by
 
sentence
 (H)
 in
 language
 L*
 is
 true.
 
(iv)  
 But
 if
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 true,
 then
 the
 proposition
 expressed
 by
 sentence
 
(H)
 in
 language
 L*
 exists,
 and
 is
 true,
 independently
 of
 whether
 the
 
language
 is
 actually
 used.
 
(v) If
 that
 proposition
 is
 true,
 then
 Herbie*
 exists.
 
Therefore,
 
(vi)  
 If
 Hirsch’s
 analysis
 is
 correct,
 then
 speakers
 of
 both
 languages
 should
 
say
 that
 Herbie*
 exists.
 
On
 both
 versions
 of
 this
 argument,
 Eklund
 concludes
 that
 Hirsch’s
 analysis
 leads
 
to
 the
 result
 that
 the
 maximal
 ontology
 is
 the
 correct
 ontology
 and,
 so,
 the
 
dispute
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 
Hirsch
 responds
 to
 Eklund
 by
 claiming
 that
 premise
 (1)
 of
 Eklund’s
 first
 
version
 of
 the
 argument
 is
 false.
 He
 draws
 a
 distinction
 between
 strong
 and
 weak
 

  82
 
readings
 of
 premise
 (1).
 He
 edits
 Eklund’s
 original
 premise
 (1)
 by
 inserting
 
bracketed
 text.
 Hirsch’s
 strong
 version
 of
 Eklund’s
 premise
 (1)
 reads
 as
 follows:
 
(1a)
  For
 a
 sentence
 of
 the
 [syntactic]
 form
 ‘F(a)’,
 of
 any
 [possible]
 
language,
 to
 be
 true,
 the
 [syntactically]
 singular
 term
 ‘a’
 must
 refer.
 
He
 calls
 the
 premise,
 as
 stated,
 a
 strong
 T-­‐sentence.
 It
 is
 a
 strong
 T-­‐sentence
 
because
 it
 is
 about
 any
 language.
 A
 weak
 version
 of
 premise
 (1)
 that
 Hirsch
 gives
 
looks
 like
 this:
 
(1b)
  For
 a
 sentence
 of
 the
 form
 ‘F(a)’,
 of
 this
 language,
 to
 be
 true,
 the
 
singular
 term
 ‘a’
 must
 refer.
 
This
 version
 is
 weak
 because
 it
 is
 only
 about
 the
 language
 in
 which
 it
 is
 uttered,
 
instead
 of
 any
 possible
 language.
 For
 any
 language,
 if
 premise
 (1)
 is
 true
 in
 it,
 
then
 premise
 (1b)
 is
 going
 to
 be
 true
 as
 well.
 Languages
 in
 which
 premise
 (1)
 is
 
true
 Hirsch
 calls
 strong
 T-­‐languages.
 However,
 languages
 in
 which
 premise
 (1b)
 
is
 true,
 but
 premise
 (1)
 is
 not,
 he
 calls
 weak
 T-­‐languages.
 According
 to
 Hirsch,
 
English
 is
 a
 weak
 T-­‐language.
 Thus,
 when
 we
 are
 using
 English,
 we
 should
 deny
 
the
 truth
 of
 premise
 (1)
 and
 affirm
 the
 truth
 of
 premise
 (1b).
 But
 Eklund
 needs
 
premise
 (1)
 to
 make
 his
 argument
 work.
 Premise
 (1b)
 would
 not
 serve
 as
 an
 
acceptable
 substitute.
 
Eklund
 is
 relying
 on
 the
 fact
 that
 we
 can
 conceive
 of
 possible
 languages
 
that
 are
 more
 ontologically
 expressive
 than
 what
 Hirsch
 takes
 English
 to
 be.
 And
 
he
 combines
 this
 agreed
 upon
 fact
 (and
 by
 this,
 I
 mean
 that
 it
 is
 agreed
 upon
 
between
 Eklund
 and
 Hirsch)
 with
 premise
 (1)
 to
 get
 to
 his
 conclusion
 that
 the
 
more
 ontologically
 inclusive
 view
 is
 correct.
 If
 it
 is
 merely
 true
 that
 in
 our
 

  83
 
language
 sentences
 of
 the
 form
 ‘F(a)’
 are
 true
 only
 if
 the
 term
 ‘a’
 refers,
 then
 it
 
might
 not
 be
 true
 that
 other
 languages
 work
 that
 way.
 And
 if
 other
 languages
 do
 
not
 work
 that
 way,
 then
 perhaps
 the
 possible
 language
 that
 is
 seemingly
 more
 
ontologically
 inclusive
 does
 not
 work
 that
 way.
 It
 might
 be
 such
 that
 in
 that
 
language
 the
 singular
 term
 in
 a
 sentence
 of
 the
 form
 ‘F(a)’
 does
 not
 need
 to
 refer
 
in
 order
 for
 the
 sentence
 to
 come
 out
 as
 true.
 While
 premise
 (1)
 might
 seem
 
intuitive
 at
 first
 glance,
 Hirsch
 asks
 Eklund
 to
 give
 a
 reason
 in
 support
 of
 the
 
assumption
 that
 premise
 (1)
 is
 true.
 In
 order
 to
 adequately
 respond,
 Eklund
 
might
 need
 to
 argue
 for
 his
 premise
 in
 the
 face
 of
 Hirsch’s
 doubts.
 

  One
 might
 respond
 to
 Hirsch
 by
 claiming
 that
 he
 is
 being
 uncharitable
 to
 
Eklund.
 One
 target
 of
 attack
 is
 Hirsch’s
 modification
 of
 Eklund’s
 premise
 (1).
 On
 
the
 one
 hand,
 the
 fact
 that
 Hirsch
 makes
 the
 premise
 more
 explicitly
 about
 any
 
possible
 language
 seems
 fine.
 It
 would
 be
 surprising
 were
 Eklund
 to
 object
 to
 that
 
aspect
 of
 Hirsch’s
 modification.
 However,
 it
 is
 not
 clear
 why
 Hirsch
 should
 think
 
that
 Eklund
 is
 trying
 to
 talk
 about
 the
 syntactic,
 rather
 than
 logical,
 form
 of
 the
 
relevant
 sentences
 (in
 the
 given
 languages).
 To
 make
 this
 clearer,
 there
 seem
 to
 
be
 two
 interpretations
 of
 Eklund’s
 premise
 (1)
 that
 might
 be
 thought
 of
 as
 on
 the
 
table.
 The
 first
 interpretation
 is
 to
 take
 Eklund
 as
 talking
 about
 syntactic
 form
 of
 
the
 relevant
 sentences.
 Another
 interpretation
 is
 to
 take
 Eklund
 as
 talking
 about
 
the
 logical
 form
 of
 the
 relevant
 sentences.
 It
 seems
 implausible
 that
 Eklund’s
 
intention
 is
 for
 the
 reader
 to
 make
 the
 former
 interpretation,
 given
 how
 
implausible
 such
 an
 interpretation
 would
 make
 the
 premise
 and
 given
 that
 there
 
is
 another
 interpretation
 that
 would
 make
 the
 premise
 more
 plausible.
 

  84
 

  It
 is
 actually
 not
 entirely
 clear
 what
 Hirsch
 means
 by
 the
 term
 ‘syntactic
 
form’.
 
 Let
 me
 start
 by
 interpreting
 him
 in
 a
 somewhat
 simplistic
 way
 and
 arguing
 
my
 point
 (that
 Hirsch
 is
 misinterpreting
 Eklund)
 on
 the
 assumption
 that
 this
 is
 
the
 right
 way
 to
 interpret
 Hirsch.
 
 Then
 after
 that,
 I
 will
 argue
 that
 even
 if
 this
 is
 
not
 the
 right
 interpretation
 of
 Hirsch—even
 if
 we
 should
 interpret
 Hirsch’s
 use
 of
 
the
 term
 ‘syntactic
 form’
 in
 some
 other
 way—he
 is
 still
 misinterpreting
 Eklund.
 
 
In
 other
 words,
 I
 will
 argue
 that
 no
 matter
 how
 we
 interpret
 Hirsch
 here,
 he
 is
 
misinterpreting
 Eklund.
 

  On
 the
 simplistic
 interpretation
 of
 Hirsch,
 ‘syntactic
 form’
 means
 
something
 like
 surface
 form.
 To
 see
 what
 I
 mean
 by
 ‘surface
 form’,
 consider
 the
 
following
 sentence:
 

  (S)
 Santa
 Claus
 is
 fat.
 
The
 surface
 form
 of
 sentence
 (S)—as
 I’m
 using
 the
 term—is
 ‘Fa’.
 But
 it
 is
 
plausible
 that
 for
 at
 least
 some
 utterances
 of
 sentence
 (S),
 what
 the
 speaker
 is
 
saying
 is
 something
 like
 according
 to
 the
 fiction
 of
 Santa
 Claus,
 Santa
 is
 fat.
 So,
 the
 
logical
 form
 of
 such
 an
 utterance
 of
 sentence
 (S)
 would
 be
 ‘According
 to
 R,
 Fa’.
 
Consider
 an
 example:
 Imagine
 two
 speakers,
 Annie
 and
 Judd,
 who
 are
 
talking
 about
 the
 story
 of
 Santa
 Claus.
 Annie
 is
 American
 and
 grew
 up
 with
 the
 
story.
 She
 celebrated
 Christmas
 while
 growing
 up
 and
 learned
 as
 a
 child
 that
 it
 
was
 just
 a
 story
 and
 not
 real.
 Judd
 grew
 up
 in
 a
 place
 where
 people
 never
 even
 
spoke
 of
 Santa
 Claus.
 He
 asks
 Annie
 to
 tell
 him
 about
 the
 story
 because
 he
 is
 
interested
 in
 her
 culture.
 After
 Annie
 tells
 Judd
 the
 basic
 story
 he
 asks
 her
 if
 Santa
 
is
 skinny
 or
 fat.
 Annie
 responds
 by
 uttering
 the
 following
 sentence:
 

  85
 
(S)
  Santa
 is
 fat.
 
On
 a
 plausible
 interpretation
 of
 this
 utterance,
 given
 this
 context,
 what
 Annie
 is
 
really
 saying
 when
 she
 answers
 Judd’s
 question
 with
 sentence
 (S)
 is
 the
 
following:
 

  (S*)
  According
 to
 the
 fiction
 of
 Santa
 Claus,
 Santa
 is
 fat.
 
Another
 way
 to
 say
 this
 is
 that
 while
 the
 syntactic
 form
 of
 Annie’s
 utterance
 of
 
sentence
 (S)
 is
 ‘F(a)’,
 the
 logical
 form
 is
 ‘According
 to
 R,
 F(a)’.
 This
 seems
 like
 a
 
possible
 case.
 In
 fact,
 it
 seems
 like
 a
 case
 that
 could
 easily
 happen
 in
 the
 actual
 
world.
 And
 it
 is
 clearly
 a
 case
 in
 which
 what
 I
 am
 calling
 the
 surface
 syntactic
 
form
 does
 not
 match
 up
 with
 the
 logical
 form.
 
So,
 now
 we
 might
 ask
 what
 the
 better
 interpretation
 of
 Eklund’s
 premise
 
(1)
 is.
 
 When
 Eklund
 talks
 about
 form,
 is
 he
 talking
 about
 logical
 form
 or
 what
 I
 
am
 calling
 surface
 form?
 
 It
 seems
 much
 more
 plausible
 to
 take
 him
 as
 talking
 
about
 logical
 form.
 It
 would
 be
 implausible
 to
 hold
 that
 the
 sentence
 ‘Santa
 is
 fat’,
 
being
 of
 the
 syntactic
 form
 ‘F(a)’,
 cannot
 be
 true
 in
 any
 possible
 language
 unless
 
the
 term
 ‘Santa’
 refers.
 Moreover,
 when
 we
 interpret
 premise
 (1)
 as
 being
 about
 
logical
 form,
 it
 comes
 out
 as
 true.
 So
 it
 seems
 that
 if
 we
 wish
 to
 be
 charitable
 
towards
 Eklund,
 then
 it
 is
 better
 to
 interpret
 premise
 (1)
 as
 being
 about
 logical
 
form
 than
 as
 being
 about
 surface
 form.
 
 
On
 the
 other
 hand,
 one
 might
 think
 that
 interpreting
 Hirsch’s
 use
 of
 
‘syntactic
 form’
 to
 mean
 surface
 form
 seems
 uncharitable,
 given
 how
 clear
 it
 is
 
that
 Eklund
 does
 not
 mean
 to
 be
 talking
 about
 surface
 form
 in
 his
 premise
 (1).
 
Perhaps
 he
 means
 to
 be
 speaking
 of
 some
 other
 kind
 of
 syntactic
 form,
 something
 

  86
 
that
 is
 distinct
 from
 logical
 form
 and
 surface
 form.
 But
 it
 does
 not
 matter,
 because
 
as
 long
 as
 he
 means
 anything
 other
 than
 logical
 form,
 then
 he
 is
 misinterpreting
 
Eklund.
 Let’s
 take
 another
 look
 at
 premise
 one:
 
(1)
  For
 a
 sentence
 of
 the
 form
 ‘F(a)’,
 of
 any
 language,
 to
 be
 true,
 the
 
singular
 term
 ‘a’
 must
 refer.
 
The
 phrase
 “of
 the
 form
 ‘F(a)’”
 is
 standardly
 used
 by
 philosophers
 to
 speak
 about
 
logical
 form.
 It
 is
 not
 standardly
 used
 by
 philosophers
 to
 speak
 about
 syntactic
 
form.
 Unless
 Eklund
 makes
 clear
 that
 he
 is
 speaking
 about
 something
 other
 than
 
logical
 form
 here,
 it
 just
 seems
 obvious
 that
 he
 is
 talking
 about
 logical
 form.
 
In
 sum,
 when
 Hirsch
 talks
 about
 the
 syntactic
 form,
 he
 either
 means
 
logical
 form
 or
 something
 else.
 If
 he
 means
 anything
 else,
 then
 it’s
 a
 bad
 
interpretation
 of
 Eklund.
 If
 he
 means
 logical
 form,
 then
 his
 attack
 on
 Eklund’s
 
argument
 fails,
 because
 if
 we
 read
 premise
 (1)
 as
 being
 about
 logical
 form,
 then
 it
 
seems
 true.
 
I
 believe
 that
 this
 is
 a
 good
 objection
 to
 Hirsch’s
 particular
 version
 of
 mere
 
verbalism.
 It
 seems
 as
 though
 Hirsch
 cannot
 allow
 some
 object
 to
 be
 a
 referent
 of
 
a
 term
 in
 some
 language
 without
 allowing
 that
 object
 into
 his
 overall
 ontology.
 
However,
 I
 am
 going
 to
 end
 up
 arguing
 that
 mere
 verbalists
 can
 adopt
 a
 different
 
version
 of
 the
 view
 (distinct
 from
 the
 version
 of
 mere
 verbalism
 that
 Hirsch
 
seems
 to
 endorse)
 and
 that
 if
 they
 do
 this,
 they
 can
 avoid
 Eklund’s
 argument.
 
Before
 I
 discuss
 the
 response
 to
 Eklund
 that
 I
 think
 can
 work,
 I
 want
 to
 
discuss
 another
 strategy
 that
 Hirsch
 might
 pursue.
 Hirsch
 might
 say
 that
 there
 
are
 not
 only
 different
 notions
 of
 existence
 in
 the
 different
 possible
 languages,
 but
 

  87
 
that
 there
 are
 also
 different
 notions
 of
 reference.
 But
 in
 the
 end,
 I
 do
 not
 think
 
that
 this
 is
 a
 sustainable
 line
 of
 thought.
 
Let’s
 take
 a
 moment
 to
 consider
 what
 would
 be
 involved
 in
 a
 theory
 that
 
included
 talk
 of
 different
 notions
 of
 reference,
 notions
 related
 to
 different
 notions
 
of
 existence.
 It
 seems
 as
 though
 this
 would
 become
 a
 mess
 rather
 quickly.
 Take
 
languages
 L
 and
 L*
 again.
 On
 such
 a
 view
 language
 L
 might
 involve
 reference
 as
 
we
 know
 it,
 the
 normal
 semantic
 relation
 that
 holds
 between
 terms
 of
 our
 
language
 and
 the
 objects
 they
 pick
 out.
 On
 the
 other
 hand,
 Language
 L*
 might
 
involve
 reference*.
 This
 would
 be
 a
 relation
 that
 functions
 like
 reference
 
functions
 in
 language
 L,
 but
 it
 might
 allow
 terms
 of
 language
 L*
 to
 pick
 out
 
objects
 that
 terms
 of
 language
 L
 do
 not.
 The
 different
 notions
 of
 existence
 and
 the
 
different
 notions
 of
 reference
 could
 be
 matched
 up
 with
 one
 another.
 Thus,
 in
 
language
 L
 you
 would
 have
 objects
 that
 exist
 and
 to
 which
 terms
 of
 L
 refer.
 And
 in
 
language
 L*
 you
 would
 have
 objects
 that
 exist*
 and
 to
 which
 terms
 of
 L*
 refer*.
 
These
 objects
 that
 are
 referents*
 of
 the
 terms
 of
 language
 L*
 would
 not
 exist.
 
To
 be
 clear,
 it
 might
 be
 that
 the
 term
 ‘exists’
 means
 the
 same
 thing
 in
 
languages
 L
 and
 L*.
 In
 such
 a
 case,
 someone
 speaking
 either
 language
 is
 going
 to
 
say
 something
 false
 when
 they
 say
 that
 the
 controversial
 objects
 ‘exist’.
 (Of
 
course,
 it
 is
 also
 possible
 that
 the
 notion
 of
 exists*
 is
 picked
 out
 by
 the
 term
 
‘exists’
 in
 language
 L*.
 If
 this
 were
 the
 case,
 then
 a
 speaker
 might
 truly
 utter
 some
 
sentence
 about
 how
 these
 objects
 “exist”.)
 It
 would
 be
 technically
 correct
 to
 say
 
that
 they
 would
 not
 exist
 at
 all,
 given
 how
 the
 notions
 of
 existence
 and
 reference
 
function
 presumably
 across
 languages.
 (That
 is,
 even
 if
 languages
 other
 than
 

  88
 
language
 L
 were
 augmented
 with
 our
 notions
 of
 existence
 and
 reference,
 the
 
notions
 would
 function
 in
 the
 same
 way,
 it
 seems.)
 Remember,
 the
 notion
 of
 
existence
 and
 the
 notion
 of
 reference
 are
 what
 we
 focus
 on
 in
 our
 language,
 on
 
this
 picture.
 These
 other
 notions
 in
 other
 languages,
 notions
 such
 as
 existence*
 
and
 reference*,
 are
 different
 but
 similar
 enough
 to
 play
 the
 right
 kind
 of
 roles
 in
 
the
 languages
 that
 utilize
 them.
 So
 plenty
 of
 objects
 that
 can
 be
 said
 to
 exist*
 
cannot
 be
 said
 to
 exist.
 To
 add
 one
 more
 layer,
 we
 can
 imagine
 yet
 another
 
language,
 L**.
 This
 language
 has
 corresponding
 existence-­‐like
 and
 reference-­‐like
 
notions,
 existence**
 and
 reference**.
 And
 parallel
 things
 can
 be
 said
 about
 that
 
language
 and
 those
 notions.
 It
 seems
 unlikely
 that
 there
 would
 only
 be
 two
 
languages
 with
 which
 we
 could
 plausibly
 speak
 about
 the
 world.
 It
 also
 seems
 
unlikely
 that
 we
 could
 not
 identify
 more
 and
 more
 expressive
 (or
 ontologically
 
inclusive)
 languages.
 If
 Hirsch
 wants
 to
 hold
 his
 ground,
 he
 would
 need
 to
 posit
 a
 
possibly
 endless
 number
 of
 existence-­‐like
 and
 reference-­‐like
 notions.
 And
 that
 is
 
to
 say
 nothing
 of
 any
 other
 notions
 that
 might
 be
 naturally
 connected
 to
 our
 
notions
 of
 existence
 and
 reference.
 In
 short,
 this
 seems
 like
 a
 distinctly
 
unpromising
 strategy
 for
 Hirsch
 to
 take.
 
Let
 me
 turn
 now
 to
 the
 strategy
 that
 I
 think
 mere
 verbalists
 can
 use
 to
 
successfully
 respond
 to
 Eklund’s
 argument.
 Hirsch’s
 vulnerability
 to
 Eklund’s
 
argument
 has
 to
 do
 with
 the
 way
 in
 which
 he
 formulates
 his
 argument
 for
 mere
 
verbalism.
 On
 Eklund’s
 interpretation,
 Hirsch
 puts
 things
 in
 terms
 of
 how
 the
 
different
 existence-­‐like
 notions
 operate
 in
 each
 language
 and
 the
 resulting
 effects
 
of
 their
 rules
 of
 use.
 However,
 I
 think
 there
 is
 another
 way
 to
 be
 a
 mere
 verbalist
 

  89
 
about
 the
 dispute
 over
 sentence
 (H),
 one
 that
 does
 not
 rely
 on
 talk
 of
 different
 
existence-­‐like
 notions,
 and
 I
 think
 that
 if
 mere
 verbalists
 endorse
 this
 other
 
version
 of
 the
 view,
 they
 can
 resist
 Eklund’s
 argument.
 
 With
 this
 in
 mind,
 
consider
 the
 following
 version
 of
 mere
 verbalism:
 
 
Sentence
 (H)
 says
 different
 things
 in
 languages
 L
 and
 L*.
 
 In
 language
 L,
 it
 
says
 what
 it
 seems
 to
 say,
 namely,
 that
 Herbie*
 is
 white.
 But
 in
 language
 
L*,
 it
 says
 something
 else.
 More
 specifically,
 it
 is
 given
 a
 deflationist
 
reading
 in
 language
 L*;
 in
 particular,
 it
 is
 synonymous
 with
 

  (H*)
 Herbie
 is
 inside
 and
 white.
 
So,
 the
 term
 ‘Herbie*’
 does
 not
 function
 in
 language
 L*
 as
 a
 name.
 In
 other
 
words,
 in
 language
 L*,
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 not
 given
 a
 face-­‐value
 reading.
 
Therefore,
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 false
 in
 language
 L
 and
 true
 in
 language
 L*.
 This
 
is
 because
 in
 language
 L,
 the
 truth
 of
 sentence
 (H)
 requires
 the
 existence
 
of
 an
 incar,
 namely,
 Herbie*,
 and
 in
 language
 L*,
 sentence
 (H)
 does
 not
 
require
 the
 existence
 of
 an
 incar.
 
A
 mere
 verbalist
 of
 this
 kind
 could
 resist
 Eklund’s
 argument
 by
 claiming
 that
 in
 
language
 L*,
 the
 term
 ‘Herbie*’
 does
 not
 refer
 to
 an
 extra
 object.
 Rather,
 in
 
language
 L*,
 the
 only
 thing
 that
 needs
 to
 exist,
 in
 order
 for
 sentence
 (H)
 to
 be
 true
 
is
 Herbie.
35

 
I
 am
 not
 going
 to
 further
 discuss
 this
 response
 to
 Eklund
 yet,
 because
 a
 
similar
 response
 will
 arise
 in
 connection
 with
 Eklund’s
 second
 argument
 below.
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
35

 I
 would
 like
 to
 thank
 Mark
 Balaguer
 (conversation)
 for
 bringing
 up
 this
 
response.
 

 

  90
 
And
 I
 would
 like
 to
 discuss
 them
 both
 together.
 So,
 let’s
 leave
 this
 this
 response
 
on
 the
 table
 for
 now
 and
 move
 on
 to
 Eklund’s
 second
 argument.
 
Eklund’s
 second
 argument
 for
 the
 view
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 not
 
merely
 verbal
 is
 called
 the
 sameness
 argument.
 One
 might
 formulate
 the
 
argument
 in
 the
 following
 way:
 
(1) If
 Hirsch’s
 analysis
 were
 correct,
 sentence
 (H)
 would
 be
 true
 in
 
language
 L
 and
 false
 in
 language
 L*.
 
(2) If
 that
 were
 true,
 then
 sentence
 (H)
 would
 need
 to
 have
 different
 truth
 
conditions
 in
 languages
 L
 and
 L*.
 
(3) But
 if
 sentence
 (H)
 had
 different
 truth
 conditions
 in
 languages
 L
 and
 
L*,
 then
 it
 would
 have
 different
 meanings
 in
 L
 and
 L*.
 
Therefore,
 
(4) Hirsch
 must
 say
 that
 there
 are
 massive
 differences
 in
 meaning
 
between
 languages
 L
 and
 L*.
 
(5) But
 this
 is
 an
 unattractive
 consequence.
 
Therefore,
 
(6) Hirsch’s
 theory
 is
 implausible.
 
A
 similar
 response
 can
 be
 given
 to
 this
 argument
 as
 was
 given
 to
 the
 last
 
argument.
 If
 mere
 verbalists
 give
 up
 the
 Hirschian
 quantifier
 variance
 way
 of
 
formulating
 their
 view
 and
 adopt
 the
 alternative
 way
 of
 formulating
 their
 view
 
described
 above,
 then
 they
 can
 respond
 as
 follows:
 
Mere
 verbalists
 can
 simply
 accept
 the
 result
 that
 sentence
 (H)
 has
 
different
 meanings
 in
 the
 different
 languages.
 In
 language
 L,
 sentence
 (H)
 

  91
 
means
 what
 it
 looks
 like
 it
 means,
 namely,
 that
 Herbie*
 is
 white.
 In
 
language
 L*,
 sentence
 (H)
 is
 not
 given
 a
 face-­‐value
 interpretation.
 Rather,
 
in
 language
 L*,
 it
 means
 that
 Herbie
 is
 inside
 and
 white.
 So,
 the
 mere
 
verbalist
 can
 just
 accept
 the
 result
 that
 sentence
 (H)
 means
 different
 
things
 in
 languages
 L
 and
 L*.
 
There
 are
 costs
 to
 both
 the
 strategy
 that
 Eklund
 takes
 against
 Hirsch
 and
 
to
 the
 possible
 mere
 verbalist
 response
 to
 Eklund.
 It
 seems
 to
 me,
 however,
 that
 
this
 possible
 mere
 verbalist
 response
 to
 Eklund
 works
 and,
 thus,
 that
 mere
 
verbalism
 about
 ontological
 issues
 remains
 a
 live
 option.
 
This
 is
 not
 to
 say
 that
 there
 is
 nothing
 appealing
 about
 Eklund’s
 general
 
argumentative
 strategy.
 Eklund’s
 general
 response
 to
 Hirsch
 has
 the
 benefit
 of
 
taking
 the
 semantics
 of
 the
 disputed
 sentences
 at
 face
 value.
 And
 there
 seems
 to
 
be
 some
 reason
 to
 think
 that,
 all
 things
 equal,
 we
 should
 want
 to
 interpret
 our
 
sentences
 in
 a
 face-­‐value
 way,
 if
 possible.
 Doing
 so
 generates
 the
 most
 intuitively
 
attractive
 theories,
 all
 things
 equal.
 Also,
 when
 we
 take
 Hirsch
 to
 be
 giving
 a
 face-­‐
value
 interpretation
 to
 the
 disputes
 sentences,
36

 Eklund’s
 strategy
 seems
 to
 be
 
devastating.
 It
 is
 difficult
 to
 see
 how
 Hirsch
 could
 read
 the
 disputed
 sentences
 in
 
the
 different
 languages
 as
 having
 the
 same
 logical
 structure
 (e.g.,
 as
 being
 of
 the
 
logical
 form
 ‘F(a)’)
 without
 committing
 to
 the
 more
 expansive
 ontology.
 At
 this
 
point,
 it
 seems
 worth
 exploring
 another
 attempt
 to
 undermine
 mere
 verbalism
 
about
 ontological
 issues.
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
36

 To
 be
 fair
 to
 Hirsch,
 or
 unfair
 depending
 on
 how
 we
 look
 at
 it,
 it
 is
 possible
 to
 
interpret
 him
 as
 sometimes
 interpreting
 disputed
 sentences
 at
 face-­‐value
 and
 
sometimes
 not.
 

  92
 
IV.
 BALAGUER’S
 ARGUMENT
 AGAINST
 ONTOLOGICAL
 MERE
 VERBALISM
 
Mark
 Balaguer
 also
 has
 an
 argument
 for
 the
 view
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 
not
 merely
 verbal.
 He
 argues
 that
 there
 is
 always
 a
 non-­‐merely
 verbal
 dispute
 to
 
be
 had
 when
 we
 are
 talking
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 (whether
 or
 not
 they
 
involve
 any
 two
 actual
 philosophers).
 He
 makes
 a
 distinction
 between
 what
 he
 
calls
 historical
 verbalism
 and
 metaphysical
 verbalism.
37

 Historical
 verbalism
 
(relative
 to
 a
 given
 ontological
 issue)
 is
 the
 view
 that
 typical
 disputes
 about
 that
 
issue
 between
 certain
 philosophers
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 Metaphysical
 verbalism
 
(relative
 to
 a
 given
 ontological
 issue)
 is
 the
 view
 that
 a
 dispute
 about
 that
 issue
 
must
 be
 merely
 verbal,
 that
 there
 is
 no
 non-­‐verbal
 dispute
 to
 be
 had
 about
 it.
 
(Balaguer
 uses
 ‘non-­‐verbal’
 to
 apply
 to
 disputes
 that
 are
 neither
 verbal
 nor
 about
 
meaning.)
 
The
 distinction
 here
 is
 an
 obvious
 but
 important
 one.
 We
 can
 imagine
 two
 
philosophers,
 Sasha
 and
 Vlad.
 Sasha
 is
 a
 presentist.
 He
 thinks
 that
 only
 present
 
objects
 exist.
 Vlad
 is
 a
 non-­‐presentist.
 He
 thinks
 that
 non-­‐present
 objects
 exist,
 as
 
well
 as
 present
 objects.
 Consider
 the
 sentence
 
 
(D)
 Dinosaurs
 exist.
 
Vlad
 thinks
 that
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 true.
 Sasha
 thinks
 that
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 false.
 But
 
as
 I
 am
 constructing
 the
 case,
 they
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 sentence
 (D),
 in
 the
 
Hirsch-­‐Manley
 sense.
 In
 Sasha’s
 language,
 sentence
 (D)
 means
 that
 dinosaurs
 
presently
 exist
 and
 so
 is
 false.
 In
 Vlad’s
 language,
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 synonymous
 
with
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
37

 Eklund
 makes
 a
 similar
 distinction
 and
 points
 out
 (NDPR
 review
 of
 Hirsch
 
(2012))
 that
 he
 and
 Balaguer
 have
 made
 this
 point.
 

  93
 
(D*)
 Dinosaurs
 did
 exist,
 do
 exist,
 or
 will
 exist.
 
Both
 would
 agree
 that
 the
 sentence
 is
 false
 in
 Sasha’s
 language
 and
 true
 in
 Vlad’s
 
language.
 So
 the
 only
 reason
 they
 disagree
 is
 that
 they’re
 using
 the
 sentence
 
differently
 in
 the
 Hirsch-­‐Manley
 sense.
 Thus,
 this
 is
 an
 instance
 of
 a
 dispute
 over
 
temporal
 ontology
 that
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 According
 to
 historical
 verbalism
 about
 
temporal
 ontology,
 typically,
 disputes
 about
 the
 subject
 are
 merely
 verbal
 in
 
something
 like
 this
 way.
 According
 to
 metaphysical
 verbalism,
 there
 is
 no
 non-­‐
verbal
 dispute
 to
 be
 had
 about
 this
 topic.
 In
 other
 words,
 any
 dispute
 we
 might
 
have
 about
 this
 subject
 would
 either
 be
 like
 the
 dispute
 between
 Sasha
 and
 Vlad
 
or
 explicitly
 about
 meaning.
 Similar
 points
 can
 be
 made
 about
 all
 ontological
 
disputes.
 Balaguer
 argues
 against
 both
 views
 but
 spends
 most
 of
 his
 time
 
focusing
 on
 metaphysical
 verbalism.
 
Before
 I
 give
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 against
 metaphysical
 verbalism,
 I
 will
 
lay
 out
 the
 conceptual
 framework
 that
 Balaguer
 utilizes
 for
 his
 argument.
 
Balaguer
 creates
 a
 matrix
 of
 view
 types.
 The
 matrix
 takes
 into
 account
 the
 
ontology
 and
 the
 semantics
 of
 different
 types
 of
 philosophical
 views.
 It
 looks
 like
 
this
38
:
 

   
   
   
   
   
   
  ONTOLOGY
 

   
   
   
   
  Thick
   
   
   
  Thin
 
SEMANTICS
   
  Thick
   
  R
   
   
   
  A
 

   
   
  Thin
   
  X
   
   
   
  T
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
38

 Balaguer
 (unpublished)
 

  94
 
Balaguer
 cuts
 the
 conceptual
 space
 up
 into
 Thick
 and
 Thin
 types
 of
 ontological
 
and
 semantic
 views.
 A
 thick
 ontological
 view,
 in
 a
 given
 domain,
 is
 one
 that
 
allows
 relevant
 controversial
 objects
 (e.g.,
 abstract
 objects,
 mereological
 sums,
 
libertarian
 free
 human
 choices,
 moral
 facts,
 etc.)
 into
 its
 ontology.
 A
 thin
 
ontological
 view,
 in
 a
 given
 domain,
 is
 one
 that
 does
 not
 allow
 the
 relevant
 
controversial
 objects
 into
 its
 ontology.
 Similarly,
 a
 thick
 semantic
 theory,
 in
 a
 
given
 domain,
 is
 one
 that
 requires
 the
 relevant
 thick
 ontological
 view
 to
 be
 true
 
in
 order
 for
 the
 relevant
 sentences
 of
 the
 language
 to
 be
 true.
 And
 a
 thin
 semantic
 
theory,
 in
 a
 given
 domain,
 is
 one
 that
 does
 not
 require
 the
 thick
 ontological
 
theory
 to
 be
 true
 in
 order
 for
 the
 sentences
 of
 the
 language
 to
 be
 true.
 And
 so
 
each
 type
 of
 view
 in
 the
 matrix
 (or
 each
 quadrant)
 is
 a
 combination
 of
 a
 type
 of
 
semantic
 theory
 and
 a
 type
 of
 ontological
 theory.
 Balaguer
 calls
 views
 in
 the
 top-­‐
left
 quadrant
 robust
 realist
 views.
 He
 calls
 views
 in
 the
 top-­‐right
 quadrant
 error
 
theories.
 He
 calls
 views
 in
 the
 lower-­‐right
 quadrant
 thin-­‐semantics
 views.
 And
 he
 
takes
 the
 lower-­‐left
 quadrant
 to
 represent
 a
 type
 of
 view
 that
 virtually
 no
 one
 
endorses
 (and,
 so,
 we
 do
 not
 need
 to
 focus
 on).
 

  To
 get
 clearer
 on
 this
 framework,
 I
 will
 apply
 it
 to
 an
 example.
 I
 will
 use
 an
 
example
 that
 Balaguer
 discusses
 but
 not
 one
 of
 the
 controversial
 examples
 that
 
are
 the
 focus
 of
 this
 chapter
 (in
 other
 words,
 not
 one
 that
 a
 lot
 of
 people
 have
 
thought
 is
 merely
 verbal).
 This
 will
 make
 it
 easy
 to
 bring
 out
 the
 framework
 
because
 the
 example
 is
 very
 clean.
 Later,
 when
 I
 get
 into
 the
 argument,
 I
 will
 use
 
one
 of
 the
 more
 controversial
 examples.
 

  95
 
Take
 the
 following
 issue
 that
 Balaguer
 talks
 about,
 the
 dispute
 about
 
abstract
 objects
 in
 the
 philosophy
 of
 mathematics.
 Consider
 the
 following
 
sentence:
 

  (M)
 2
 +
 2
 =
 4.
 
Each
 type
 of
 view
 in
 the
 matrix
 says
 something
 about
 the
 semantics
 of
 sentence
 
(M)
 and
 about
 the
 ontological
 question
 of
 whether
 or
 not
 abstract
 objects
 exist.
 
The
 top-­‐left
 quadrant
 represents
 platonist
 views.
 Platonism
 says
 that
 in
 order
 for
 
sentence
 (M)
 to
 be
 true,
 there
 need
 to
 be
 abstract
 objects,
 and
 there
 are
 abstract
 
objects.
 The
 top-­‐right
 quadrant
 represents
 fictionalist
 views.
 Fictionalism
 says
 
that
 in
 order
 for
 sentence
 (M)
 to
 be
 true,
 there
 need
 to
 be
 abstract
 objects,
 but
 
there
 are
 no
 abstract
 objects,
 so
 sentence
 (M)
 is
 false.
 The
 lower-­‐right
 quadrant
 
represents
 thin-­‐semantics
 views.
 There
 are
 a
 lot
 of
 views
 of
 this
 kind
 that
 people
 
take
 seriously
 (e.g.,
 psychologism,
 physicalism,
 if-­‐then-­‐ism,
 etc.).
 What
 they
 all
 
have
 in
 common
 is
 that
 they
 say
 that
 there
 are
 no
 abstract
 objects,
 but
 sentence
 
(M)
 is
 still
 true
 because
 the
 truth
 of
 sentence
 (M)
 doesn’t
 require
 the
 existence
 of
 
abstract
 objects.
 The
 lower-­‐left
 quadrant
 represents
 views
 that
 are
 not
 taken
 
seriously.
 A
 view
 of
 this
 kind
 would
 say
 that
 there
 are
 abstract
 objects
 but
 they
 
are
 not
 required
 for
 the
 truth
 of
 sentence
 (M).
 

  Now
 let’s
 take
 a
 look
 at
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 against
 metaphysical
 verbalism.
 
He
 argues
 that
 for
 any
 ontological
 dispute,
 you
 can
 generate
 a
 merely
 verbal
 
dispute
 between
 a
 philosopher
 who
 takes
 an
 error
 theory
 to
 be
 true
 and
 a
 
philosopher
 who
 takes
 a
 thin-­‐semantics
 view
 to
 be
 true.
 But
 more
 importantly,
 
he
 argues
 that
 you
 can
 generate
 a
 non-­‐verbal
 dispute
 between
 a
 philosopher
 who
 

  96
 
takes
 an
 error
 theory
 to
 be
 true
 and
 a
 philosopher
 who
 takes
 a
 robust
 realist
 
view
 to
 be
 true.
 Also,
 while
 Balaguer
 does
 not
 say
 this,
 we
 can
 generate
 a
 merely
 
verbal
 agreement
 between
 a
 philosopher
 who
 takes
 a
 robust
 realist
 view
 to
 be
 
true
 and
 a
 philosopher
 who
 takes
 a
 thin-­‐semantics
 view
 to
 be
 true.
 

  Let’s
 go
 through
 the
 argument
 slowly
 using
 the
 temporal
 ontology
 dispute.
 
First
 it
 is
 easy
 to
 see
 how
 we
 can
 describe
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 about
 
temporal
 ontology.
 Consider
 two
 philosophers,
 Vlad
 and
 Nadia.
 Vlad,
 who
 we
 met
 
before,
 thinks
 that
 

  (D)
 Dinosaurs
 exist
 
 
is
 true.
 The
 reason
 he
 thinks
 that
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 true
 is
 that
 he
 believes
 the
 
sentence
 is
 synonymous
 with
 

  (D*)
 Dinosaurs
 did
 exist,
 do
 exist,
 or
 will
 exist.
 
Nadia
 is
 a
 presentist
 and
 she
 believes
 that
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 false.
 Moreover,
 Nadia
 
speaks
 a
 language
 in
 which
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 not
 analytically
 entailed
 by
 sentence
 
(D*).
 She
 also
 thinks
 that
 sentence
 (D)
 does
 not
 analytically
 entail
 

  (D**)
 Dinosaurs
 exist
 at
 the
 present
 time.
 
Nadia
 believes
 that
 in
 order
 for
 sentence
 (D)
 to
 be
 true
 (assuming
 the
 empirical
 
facts
 that
 dinosaurs
 used
 to
 exist
 but
 do
 not
 exist
 at
 the
 present
 time),
 reality
 
must
 be
 a
 four-­‐dimensional
 block
 such
 that
 the
 times
 at
 which
 dinosaurs
 existed
 
are
 just
 as
 real
 as
 the
 present
 time.
 And,
 so,
 Nadia
 thinks
 that
 sentence
 (D)
 is
 false
 
because
 she
 believes
 that
 reality
 is
 not
 a
 four-­‐dimensional
 block.
 Vlad
 and
 Nadia
 
speak
 different
 languages
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 sense
 and,
 so,
 do
 not
 believe
 
contradictory
 things
 on
 that
 level.
 

  97
 

  It
 is
 equally
 easy
 to
 describe
 a
 non-­‐verbal
 dispute
 about
 temporal
 ontology
 
between
 Nadia
 and
 Boris,
 a
 robust
 eternalist.
 Boris
 speaks
 the
 same
 language
 as
 
Nadia,
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 sense.
 Moreover,
 he
 shares
 Nadia’s
 beliefs
 about
 
what
 is
 required
 for
 the
 truth
 of
 sentence
 (D),
 but
 he
 also
 believes
 that
 sentence
 
(D)
 is
 true
 (because
 he
 believes
 reality
 is
 a
 four-­‐dimensional
 block
 and
 that
 
dinosaurs
 are
 somewhere
 in
 there).
 So,
 to
 put
 it
 another
 way,
 Boris
 believes
 that
 
dinosaurs
 exist
 tenselessly.
 This
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 non-­‐verbal
 dispute
 and
 Balaguer
 
claims
 that
 this
 kind
 of
 dispute
 can
 be
 created
 for
 any
 ontological
 dispute.
 The
 
formula
 is
 just
 to
 stipulate
 two
 philosophers
 who
 share
 a
 language,
 in
 the
 
Hirsch/Manley
 sense,
 that
 has
 a
 thick
 semantics.
 One
 has
 a
 thin
 ontology
 and
 the
 
other
 has
 a
 thick
 ontology.
 So,
 the
 dispute
 will
 be
 between
 an
 error
 theorist
 and
 a
 
robust
 realist.
 And
 since
 they
 agree
 on
 the
 semantics
 and
 disagree
 on
 the
 
ontology,
 the
 dispute
 is
 non-­‐verbal.
 Thus,
 in
 all
 of
 these
 cases,
 there
 is
 a
 non-­‐
verbal
 dispute
 to
 be
 had,
 and
 so
 metaphysical
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 
disputes
 is
 false.
 

  So,
 Balaguer’s
 idea
 is
 that
 since
 the
 disputants
 on
 the
 top
 row
 of
 the
 matrix
 
agree
 on
 the
 semantics
 they
 cannot
 be
 having
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute;
 and
 since
 
the
 disputants
 in
 the
 right
 column
 have
 the
 same
 ontology
 and
 differ
 on
 the
 
semantics,
 their
 dispute
 must
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 

  Analogously,
 one
 could
 turn
 many
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 (generally
 
described)
 into
 substantive
 disputes
 by
 having
 the
 disputants
 disagree
 on
 the
 
ontology
 but
 agree
 about
 the
 semantics.
 However,
 this
 is
 not
 as
 interesting
 of
 a
 
fact.
 Balaguer’s
 point
 is
 that
 insofar
 as
 there
 is
 some
 substantive
 dispute
 in
 the
 

  98
 
neighborhood
 of
 a
 purported
 merely
 verbal
 dispute,
 then
 that
 is
 a
 dispute
 that
 
philosophers
 can
 reasonably
 focus
 on
 without
 worrying
 about
 engaging
 in
 a
 
pseudo-­‐dispute.
 

  I
 take
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 against
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 
to
 be
 pretty
 convincing.
 However,
 there
 are
 a
 couple
 things
 worth
 saying
 here.
 
Balaguer’s
 argument
 obviously
 is
 not
 aimed
 at
 merely
 verbal
 disputes
 in
 general.
 
So,
 nothing
 that
 he
 says
 should
 be
 thought
 to
 hurt
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 non-­‐
ontological
 disputes.
 Also,
 it
 does
 not
 affect
 deflationism
 in
 general.
 This
 seems
 
worth
 pointing
 out.
 It
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 plausible
 that
 mere
 verbalists
 are
 motivated
 
by
 some
 kind
 of
 deflationist
 intuition
 about
 ontological
 disputes.
 I,
 in
 fact,
 started
 
out
 with
 such
 an
 intuition
 about
 ontological
 disputes.
 

  The
 sense
 that
 some
 of
 us
 get
 is
 that
 there
 is
 not
 a
 real
 dispute
 going
 on
 in
 
front
 of
 us
 as
 we
 read
 two
 philosophers
 (and
 then
 two
 more
 and
 so
 on)
 argue
 
their
 positions
 on
 either
 side
 of
 these
 disputes.
 There
 is
 something
 defective
 
about
 the
 disputes,
 it
 seems
 to
 us.
 And
 one
 obvious
 way
 to
 go
 with
 that
 intuition
 
is
 the
 mere
 verbalist
 route.
 The
 idea
 that
 the
 two
 philosophers
 (or
 philosophers,
 
generally,
 on
 each
 side
 of
 the
 dispute
 in
 question)
 are
 talking
 past
 each
 other
 is
 a
 
tempting
 one.
 And
 we
 follow
 that
 idea
 out
 to
 its
 logical
 conclusions.
 We
 find
 
ourselves,
 perhaps,
 not
 liking
 what
 we
 see
 when
 we
 run
 into
 an
 argument,
 such
 
as
 Balaguer’s,
 that
 makes
 it
 quite
 difficult
 to
 believe
 that
 mere
 verbalism
 is
 the
 
correct
 diagnosis
 in
 these
 cases.
 But
 that
 does
 not
 mean
 that
 the
 initial
 intuition
 
was
 incorrect.
 That
 does
 not
 mean
 that
 there
 is
 not
 something
 defective
 about
 

  99
 
these
 disputes.
 It
 merely
 means
 that
 we
 can
 perhaps
 rule
 out
 one
 way
 in
 which
 
the
 disputes
 might
 have
 been
 defective.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  100
 
CHAPTER
 5
 –
 

   
   
   
  I.
 INTRODUCTION
 
In
 the
 last
 chapter,
 I
 argued
 that
 the
 argument
 of
 Balaguer
 is
 convincing
 in
 
support
 of
 the
 claim
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 Again,
 what
 
is
 interesting
 about
 this
 is
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 are
 generally
 considered
 the
 
best
 candidates
 for
 merely
 verbal
 philosophical
 disputes
 -­‐
 even
 by
 those
 who
 do
 
not
 think
 they
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 believe
 that
 a
 different,
 but
 broader
 class
 of
 
disputes
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 More
 accurately,
 I
 believe
 that
 two
 related
 classes
 of
 
disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 The
 first
 class
 contains
 disputes
 that
 involve
 clashing
 
intuitions
 about
 philosophically
 relevant
 cases.
 I
 will
 call
 these
 I-­‐disputes.
 The
 
second
 class
 contains
 disputes
 over
 necessary
 or
 sufficient
 conditions
 for
 the
 
application
 of
 some
 term.
 I
 will
 call
 these
 disputes
 S-­‐disputes.
 

  In
 section
 II,
 I
 will
 give
 the
 reader
 a
 better
 grip
 on
 the
 notion
 of
 an
 I-­‐
dispute
 and
 the
 notion
 of
 an
 S-­‐dispute.
 In
 section
 III,
 I
 will
 give
 a
 brief
 argument
 
for
 the
 claim
 that
 a
 certain
 kind
 of
 philosophical
 I-­‐dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 
consider
 the
 claim
 that
 S-­‐dispute
 are
 merely
 verbal
 to
 be
 much
 more
 interesting
 
than
 the
 claim
 that
 I-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal
 and
 so
 will
 focus
 a
 larger
 portion
 
of
 the
 chapter
 on
 arguing
 for
 the
 former
 claim.
 In
 section
 IV,
 I
 will
 provide
 four
 
different
 arguments
 for
 the
 claim
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 
My
 expectation
 is
 that
 the
 reader
 will
 be
 more
 inclined
 to
 be
 sympathetic
 
to
 my
 claim
 that
 I-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal
 than
 they
 will
 be
 to
 my
 claim
 that
 S-­‐
disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 It
 is
 important
 to
 note
 that
 the
 arguments
 for
 each
 
conclusion
 are
 independent
 of
 each
 other,
 even
 if
 they
 are
 related
 in
 obvious
 

  101
 
ways.
 But
 just
 because
 one
 doubts
 my
 primary
 claim
 about
 S-­‐disputes
 does
 not
 
mean
 that
 she
 should
 feel
 a
 need
 to
 doubt
 my
 primary
 claim
 about
 I-­‐disputes.
 
And,
 of
 course,
 the
 reverse
 is
 true
 as
 well.
 One
 should
 be
 able
 to
 agree
 with
 me
 
about
 S-­‐disputes
 even
 if
 she
 does
 not
 agree
 with
 me
 about
 I-­‐disputes.
 (I
 just
 think
 
that
 is
 a
 less
 likely
 scenario.)
 
II.
 CHARACTERIZING
 I-­‐DISPUTES
 AND
 S-­‐DISPUTES
 
Let
 me
 give
 a
 more
 complete
 formulation
 of
 what
 an
 I-­‐dispute
 is.
 An
 I-­‐dispute
 is
 a
 
dispute
 between
 two
 people
 that
 is
 generated
 by
 a
 difference
 in
 intuitions
 about
 a
 
case,
 in
 particular,
 whether
 or
 not
 some
 term
 applies
 in
 a
 scenario.
 For
 example,
 
recall
 Jenny
 and
 Jackson’s
 dispute
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 a
 particular
 drinking
 
vessel
 counts
 as
 a
 cup.
 Jenny
 thinks
 it
 is
 a
 cup
 and
 Jackson
 thinks
 it
 is
 not
 a
 cup.
 
They
 have
 differing
 intuitions
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 applies
 to
 that
 
particular
 object.
 This
 is
 an
 ordinary
 example
 of
 an
 I-­‐dispute.
 In
 philosophy,
 I-­‐
disputes
 occur
 as
 well.
 For
 example,
 a
 compatibilist
 about
 free
 will
 and
 a
 
libertarian
 about
 free
 will
 might
 have
 differing
 intuitions
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 
the
 term
 ‘free
 will’
 (or
 the
 terms
 ‘free’
 or
 ‘freedom’)
 apply
 in
 some
 scenario
 
involving
 a
 fully
 determined
 agent
 making
 a
 decision.
 Philosophical
 I-­‐disputes
 
can
 also
 occur
 with
 respect
 to
 other
 philosophically
 interesting
 terms,
 like
 
‘reason’,
 ‘knowledge’,
 ‘justification’,
 etc.
 

  Now,
 let
 me
 characterize
 what
 I
 will
 be
 calling
 S-­‐disputes.
 An
 S-­‐dispute
 is
 a
 
dispute
 between
 two
 people
 over
 some
 necessary
 or
 sufficient
 condition
 for
 
inclusion
 in
 some
 category.
 For
 instance,
 recall
 again
 Jenny
 and
 Jackson.
 Their
 I-­‐
dispute
 about
 the
 cup
 is
 tightly
 related
 to
 their
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 whether
 cups
 can
 

  102
 
be
 made
 of
 glass.
 Jenny
 thinks
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 glass,
 and
 Jackson
 thinks
 that
 
they
 cannot.
 In
 philosophy,
 S-­‐disputes
 clearly
 occur
 as
 well.
 For
 example,
 a
 
compatibilist
 about
 free
 will
 and
 a
 libertarian
 disagree
 about
 whether
 or
 not
 a
 
fully
 determined
 agent
 can
 have
 free
 will.
 The
 compatibilist
 thinks
 that
 such
 an
 
agent
 can
 have
 free
 will,
 and
 the
 libertarian
 thinks
 such
 an
 agent
 cannot
 have
 free
 
will.
 

  Often
 when
 philosophers
 engage
 in
 S-­‐disputes,
 they
 are
 looking
 to
 state
 
necessary
 and
 sufficient
 conditions
 for
 inclusion
 in
 the
 relevant
 category.
 When
 
they
 do
 this,
 they
 are
 trying
 to
 answer
 some
 question
 of
 the
 form
 ‘What
 is
 x?’,
 or
 
‘What
 is
 an
 x?’
 For
 example,
 philosophers
 engage
 in
 disputes
 over
 what
 free
 will
 
is,
 what
 a
 reason
 is,
 what
 knowledge
 is,
 and
 so
 on.
 Let
 me
 get
 a
 bit
 more
 detailed
 
about
 a
 specific
 example.
 In
 this
 chapter,
 I
 will
 often
 focus
 on
 the
 example
 of
 the
 
S-­‐dispute
 that
 occurs
 between
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 over
 the
 question,
 
‘What
 is
 a
 reason?’
 But
 this
 is
 just
 an
 example.
 I
 could
 use
 other
 examples,
 like
 
‘What
 is
 free
 will?’,
 ‘What
 is
 knowledge?’,
 etc.
 
Humeans
 about
 reasons,
 broadly
 speaking,
 think
 a
 reason
 is
 a
 relation
 
that,
 among
 other
 things,
 is
 “hooked”
 into
 the
 agent
 in
 some
 personal
 way.
 (The
 
way
 reasons
 are
 hooked
 into
 us
 is
 generally
 characterized
 as
 via
 desires
 or
 
interests
 or
 some
 other
 psychological
 state.
 In
 this
 chapter
 I
 will
 sometimes
 use
 
the
 term
 ‘desire’
 as
 a
 placeholder
 for
 any
 candidate
 that
 the
 Humeans
 might
 want
 
to
 put
 in
 that
 slot.)
 Non-­‐Humeans,
 broadly
 speaking,
 think
 that
 it
 is
 not
 true
 that
 a
 
reason
 must
 be
 hooked
 into
 an
 agent
 in
 this
 way.
 That
 is,
 on
 the
 former
 view,
 in
 
order
 for
 a
 particular
 person
 to
 have
 a
 reason
 to
 act
 in
 a
 particular
 way,
 she
 must
 

  103
 
have
 some
 desire
 or
 interest
 that
 is
 served
 by
 acting
 in
 that
 particular
 way.
 On
 
the
 latter
 view,
 no
 such
 desire
 or
 interest
 (or
 psychological
 state)
 is
 needed
 for
 
the
 reason
 to
 act
 in
 that
 particular
 way
 to
 be
 possessed
 by
 the
 agent.
 
On
 a
 plausible
 account
 of
 what
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 about
 reasons
 
fundamentally
 argue
 about,
 they
 are
 arguing
 over
 the
 correct
 answer
 to
 the
 
question
 ‘What
 is
 a
 reason?’
 This
 is
 not
 to
 say
 that
 there
 is
 nothing
 about
 which
 
Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 agree
 with
 respect
 to
 this
 question.
 There
 are
 many
 
claims
 about
 reasons
 that
 both
 camps
 would
 say
 are
 true
 and
 many
 that
 both
 
would
 say
 are
 false.
 For
 instance,
 both
 might
 agree
 that
 reasons
 are
 relations.
 
Both
 would
 agree
 that
 reasons
 can
 justify
 action.
 Both
 would
 deny
 that
 reasons
 
are
 non-­‐normative.
 And
 these
 are
 possible
 answers
 to
 the
 question
 ‘What
 is
 a
 
reason?’.
 However,
 the
 disputants
 count
 as
 disagreeing
 about
 what
 a
 reason
 is
 to
 
the
 extent
 that
 they
 have
 different
 views
 about
 how
 to
 characterize
 what
 a
 reason
 
is.
 And
 the
 Humeans/non-­‐Humeans
 do
 have
 such
 a
 disagreement.
 
III.
 AN
 ARGUMENT
 THAT
 I-­‐DISPUTES
 (OF
 A
 CERTAIN
 KIND)
 
ARE
 MERELY
 VERBAL
 
In
 this
 section
 I
 will
 briefly
 address
 a
 specific
 sort
 of
 philosophical
 I-­‐dispute
 that
 I
 
believe
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 Then
 in
 the
 next
 section,
 I
 will
 move
 on
 to
 the
 more
 
philosophically
 interesting
 case
 of
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 for
 the
 remainder
 of
 
the
 chapter.
 

  The
 kind
 of
 I-­‐dispute
 in
 philosophy
 that
 is
 most
 clearly
 merely
 verbal
 is
 a
 
dispute
 between
 an
 error
 theorist
 about
 some
 topic
 and
 what
 we
 can
 call
 a
 thin
 
realist
 (about
 the
 same
 topic).
 By
 a
 thin
 realist,
 I
 mean
 someone
 who
 occupies
 the
 

  104
 
lower-­‐right
 hand
 cell
 of
 the
 Balaguer
 matrix
 discussed
 in
 chapter
 4.
 This
 is
 
someone
 who
 thinks
 that
 the
 application
 conditions
 of
 the
 relevant
 predicate
 are
 
metaphysically
 non-­‐demanding.
 So,
 for
 instance
 a
 Humean
 about
 reasons
 or
 a
 
compatibilist
 about
 free
 will.
 In
 order
 to
 bring
 this
 kind
 of
 dispute
 into
 clearer
 
focus
 for
 the
 reader,
 I
 will
 concentrate
 on
 the
 case
 of
 free
 will.
 (Again,
 this
 is
 not
 
the
 only
 example
 that
 I
 think
 falls
 into
 this
 category.
 But
 it
 is
 a
 relatively
 clean
 
example
 that
 is
 easy
 to
 explain.)
 
So,
 take
 a
 dispute
 between
 the
 Humean
 compatibilist
 about
 free
 will
 and
 
the
 hard
 determinist.
 The
 Humean
 compatibilist
 takes
 free
 will
 to
 just
 be
 roughly
 
the
 ability
 to
 act
 in
 accordance
 with
 your
 desires.
 And
 the
 hard
 determinist
 is
 
someone
 who
 thinks
 that
 free
 will
 is
 libertarian
 freedom,
 which
 requires
 
indeterminism,
 and
 that
 we
 do
 not
 have
 libertarian
 freedom
 because
 
determinism
 is
 true.
 Given
 this,
 consider
 the
 following
 case:
 
BECKY:
 Determinism
 is
 true.
 Every
 event
 in
 the
 universe
 is
 determined
 by
 
previous
 events.
 Becky
 really
 wants
 to
 have
 an
 ice
 cream
 cone.
 She
 goes
 to
 
Baskin
 Robbins
 and
 surprisingly
 they
 are
 out
 of
 29
 of
 their
 31
 flavors.
 
They
 have
 only
 two,
 vanilla
 and
 Chocolate
 Banana
 Peanut
 Butter
 Surprise.
 
Becky
 detests
 Chocolate
 Banana
 Peanut
 Butter
 Surprise.
 But,
 luckily,
 her
 
favorite
 flavor
 of
 ice
 cream
 is
 vanilla.
 So,
 for
 her,
 there
 is
 no
 contest
 and
 
she
 chooses
 vanilla.
 The
 choice
 is
 fully
 determined;
 Becky’s
 preferences
 in
 
the
 case
 were
 casually
 determined
 by
 events
 that
 occurred
 before
 she
 was
 
born.
 And
 these
 preferences
 determined
 her
 choice.
 In
 fact,
 the
 choice
 was
 
determined
 to
 happen
 from
 the
 moment
 of
 the
 Big
 Bang.
 

  105
 
Now
 imagine
 two
 philosophers:
 David,
 a
 Humean
 compatibilist,
 and
 Charlie,
 a
 
hard
 determinist.
 David
 says
 that
 Becky
 chooses
 freely
 in
 the
 above
 case
 and
 
Charlie
 says
 that
 she
 does
 not.
 I
 claim
 that
 the
 debate
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 
Each
 party
 to
 the
 dispute
 has
 a
 different
 conception
 of
 what
 is
 needed
 in
 
order
 for
 us
 to
 have
 free
 will.
 They
 do
 not
 disagree
 about
 the
 relevant
 facts
 of
 the
 
case.
 Both
 parties
 believe
 that
 humans
 have
 Humean
 freedom,
 the
 ability
 to
 do
 
what
 one
 wants,
 and
 they
 both
 agree
 that
 Becky
 has
 Humean
 freedom
 in
 the
 
above
 case;
 moreover,
 they
 both
 agree
 that
 humans
 do
 not
 have
 libertarian
 
freedom
 and
 that,
 in
 the
 above
 case,
 Becky
 does
 not
 have
 libertarian
 freedom.
 But
 
David
 thinks
 that
 Humean
 freedom
 is
 all
 that
 is
 required
 for
 Becky
 to
 have
 free
 
will
 –
 and
 to
 choose
 her
 flavor
 of
 ice
 cream
 freely.
 And
 Charlie
 thinks
 that
 
libertarian
 freedom
 is
 needed
 for
 this.
 If
 we
 imagine
 running
 a
 Hirsch/Manley-­‐
style
 thought
 experiment
 on
 them
 it
 is
 difficult
 to
 see
 how
 they
 would
 mean
 the
 
same
 thing
 by
 the
 relevant
 terms
 of
 the
 debate
 and
 its
 cognates;
 ‘free
 will’
 and
 
‘freedom’.
 They
 use
 these
 terms
 with
 different
 application
 conditions.
 David
 uses
 
them
 with
 application
 conditions
 that
 are
 much
 weaker
 than
 the
 application
 
conditions
 that
 Charlie
 uses
 them
 with.
 So,
 it
 seems
 as
 though
 they
 agree
 on
 the
 
non-­‐linguistic
 facts
 and
 only
 disagree
 in
 their
 usage
 of
 the
 central
 terms
 of
 the
 
dispute.
 Thus,
 the
 dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 
One
 might
 object
 to
 my
 diagnosis
 of
 mere
 verbal-­‐ness
 in
 this
 case
 by
 
claiming
 that
 David
 and
 Charlie
 mean
 the
 same
 thing
 by
 the
 term
 ‘free
 will’
 (and
 
the
 relevantly
 related
 terms)
 and
 they
 associate
 one
 overriding
 application
 
condition,
 namely,
 that
 a
 person
 is
 morally
 responsible
 for
 some
 action.
 In
 such
 a
 

  106
 
case,
 that
 person
 has
 free
 will.
 Now,
 imagine
 a
 case
 like
 BECKY,
 but
 it
 involves
 a
 
decision
 that
 is
 morally
 relevant.
 We
 will
 call
 this
 hypothetical
 case
 BECKY*
 (and
 
in
 the
 scenario
 there
 is
 another
 person,
 Becky*).
 When
 considering
 BECKY*,
 
David
 thinks
 that
 Becky*
 is
 morally
 responsible
 for
 her
 action.
 Charlie
 thinks
 that
 
she
 is
 not
 morally
 responsible.
 And
 this
 is
 the
 difference,
 one
 might
 claim,
 that
 
generates
 the
 dispute
 between
 David
 and
 Charlie
 over
 whether
 Becky*
 is
 acting
 
freely
 in
 the
 scenario.
 
It
 seems
 to
 me
 that
 this
 is
 not
 a
 good
 objection.
 The
 notion
 of
 moral
 
responsibility
 is
 open
 to
 different
 interpretations,
 just
 like
 the
 notion
 of
 free
 will.
 
There
 is
 a
 notion
 of
 moral
 responsibility
 that
 requires
 libertarian
 freedom
 and
 
there
 is
 a
 notion
 of
 moral
 responsibility
 that
 merely
 requires
 Humean
 
compatibilist
 freedom.
 So,
 in
 BECKY*,
 David
 and
 Charlie
 are
 just
 as
 plausibly
 
having
 a
 merely
 verbal
 dispute
 involving
 moral
 responsibility.
 If
 we
 run
 a
 
Hirsch/Manley
 thought
 experiment
 on
 them,
 they
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 the
 
term
 ‘moral
 responsibility’
 and
 its
 cognates.
 Thus,
 the
 move
 to
 talking
 about
 
moral
 responsibility
 leaves
 us
 in
 the
 same
 kind
 of
 situation
 as
 it
 seemed
 we
 were
 
in
 prior
 to
 the
 move.
 And
 the
 dispute
 looks
 merely
 verbal.
 
IV.
 ARGUMENTS
 FOR
 THE
 CLAIM
 THAT
 S-­‐DISPUTES
 ARE
 MERELY
 VERBAL
 
Let
 me
 move
 on
 now
 to
 the
 more
 important
 job
 of
 arguing
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 
merely
 verbal.
 I
 have
 four
 arguments
 for
 this
 view.
 
IV.1
 THE
 CUP
 ARGUMENT
 
Recall
 the
 case
 of
 Jenny
 and
 Jackson
 from
 earlier.
 Jenny
 asks
 Jackson
 to
 hand
 her
 
a
 specific
 drinking
 vessel.
 The
 vessel
 is
 made
 of
 glass.
 She
 calls
 it
 a
 cup.
 Jackson
 

  107
 
hands
 it
 to
 her,
 but
 corrects
 her.
 He
 says
 that
 cups
 cannot
 be
 made
 of
 glass,
 so
 the
 
object
 in
 question
 is
 not
 a
 cup.
 Now,
 suppose
 that
 Jenny
 disagrees
 with
 this
 claim
 
and
 they
 start
 arguing
 about
 what
 a
 cup
 is.
 In
 this
 case,
 they
 have
 two
 
disagreements
 –
 one
 over
 whether
 or
 not
 the
 object
 in
 question
 is
 a
 cup
 and
 
another
 one
 over
 what
 a
 cup
 is
 (and
 in
 particular,
 whether
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 
glass).
 The
 former
 is
 an
 example
 of
 what
 I
 am
 calling
 an
 I-­‐dispute.
 The
 latter
 is
 an
 
example
 of
 what
 I
 am
 calling
 an
 S-­‐dispute.
 
 
Let
 me
 elaborate.
 For
 whatever
 reason,
 Jenny
 and
 Jackson
 have
 learned
 to
 
use
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 differently.
 When
 Jenny
 looks
 at
 the
 drinking
 vessel,
 her
 
intuition
 is
 that
 it
 is
 a
 cup.
 Jackson
 has
 a
 different
 intuition.
 There
 is
 no
 amount
 of
 
reflection
 or
 non-­‐linguistic
 empirical
 research
 that
 could
 get
 either
 of
 them
 to
 
give
 up
 their
 intuition.
 (This
 is
 stipulated.)
 If
 we
 bring
 each
 of
 these
 people
 to
 a
 
Hirch/Manley-­‐style
 scenario
 in
 which
 they
 are
 embedded
 in
 a
 linguistic
 
community
 in
 which
 all
 the
 members
 of
 the
 community
 speak
 just
 like
 them,
 then
 
they
 will
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 the
 term
 ‘cup’.
 Given
 this
 fact,
 they
 are,
 of
 
course,
 going
 to
 make
 different
 judgments
 in
 some
 cases
 about
 whether
 an
 object
 
is
 a
 cup.
 And
 the
 difference
 in
 their
 judgment
 about
 whether
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 
glass
 has
 everything
 to
 do
 with
 this.
 They
 have
 each
 accepted
 a
 particular
 way
 of
 
applying
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 and
 their
 partial
 analysis
 of
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 
(which
 is
 one
 way
 that
 we
 can
 at
 least
 roughly
 characterize
 their
 acceptance
 or
 
rejection
 of
 the
 claim
 that
 cups
 cannot
 be
 made
 of
 glass)
 is
 indicative
 of
 this
 
difference
 between
 them.
 

  108
 
So,
 to
 repeat
 for
 the
 sake
 of
 clarity,
 the
 disagreement
 between
 Jenny
 and
 
Jackson
 over
 whether
 the
 object
 in
 front
 of
 them
 is
 a
 cup
 is
 a
 dispute
 generated
 
by
 conflicting
 intuitions
 about
 a
 case
 and,
 thus,
 an
 I-­‐dispute.
 But
 in
 the
 case
 in
 
which
 they
 disagree
 over
 whether
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 glass,
 they
 are
 disagreeing
 
about
 whether
 not
 being
 made
 of
 glass
 is
 a
 necessary
 condition
 for
 an
 object
 to
 be
 
a
 cup.
 They
 are
 disagreeing
 about
 exactly
 what
 notion
 is
 picked
 out
 by
 the
 term
 
‘cup’
 and,
 thus,
 are
 having
 an
 S-­‐dispute.
 

  Now
 consider
 the
 following
 argument:
 
(1) Intuitively,
 it
 seems
 that
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 between
 Jenny
 and
 Jackson
 over
 
what
 a
 cup
 is
 (in
 particular,
 whether
 cups
 can
 be
 made
 of
 glass)
 is
 
merely
 verbal.
 
(2) There
 is
 no
 relevant
 difference
 between
 this
 S-­‐dispute
 and
 
philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 (e.g.,
 the
 dispute
 about
 what
 a
 reason
 is,
 what
 
free
 will
 is,
 etc.).
 
Therefore,
 
(3) Philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 
The
 argument
 for
 premise
 (2)
 is
 that,
 structurally,
 the
 cup
 dispute
 is
 the
 same
 as
 
philosophical
 S-­‐disputes.
 They
 are
 disputes
 about
 what
 concept
 is
 picked
 out
 by
 
some
 term
 (e.g.,
 the
 term
 ‘cup’
 or
 ‘reason’
 or
 whatever),
 or
 about
 what
 the
 
application
 conditions
 of
 the
 term
 are.
 Philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 involve
 terms
 and
 
concepts
 that
 are
 more
 philosophically
 interesting
 than
 those
 involved
 in
 the
 cup
 
dispute.
 Surely,
 terms
 like
 ‘reasons’
 and
 ‘free
 will’
 pick
 out
 more
 interesting
 and,
 
possibly,
 more
 complex,
 referents
 than
 a
 term
 like
 ‘cup’.
 But
 that
 is
 not
 relevant
 

  109
 
to
 the
 issue
 at
 hand.
 It
 remains
 true
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 over
 what
 a
 reason
 is
 or
 what
 
free
 will
 is
 (or
 any
 similar
 subject
 of
 philosophical
 interest)
 are
 disputes
 over
 
whether
 some
 condition
 is
 necessary
 or
 sufficient
 for
 some
 term
 (or
 concept)
 to
 
apply.
 Thus,
 there
 is
 no
 relevant
 difference
 between
 the
 cup
 S-­‐dispute
 and
 these
 
philosophical
 S-­‐disputes.
 

  Now,
 if
 the
 reader
 is
 persuaded
 by
 this
 argument
 for
 premise
 (2)
 but
 does
 
not
 want
 to
 concede
 the
 truth
 of
 (3),
 then
 she
 might
 want
 to
 deny
 (1).
 I
 do
 not
 
want
 to
 try
 to
 convince
 the
 reader
 to
 share
 my
 intuition
 about
 the
 cup
 case.
 I
 take
 
the
 intuition
 an
 easy
 one
 to
 have.
 And
 it
 seems
 to
 me
 easy
 to
 get
 others
 to
 have
 
the
 intuition.
 But
 I
 will
 just
 move
 on
 to
 the
 other
 arguments
 for
 S-­‐disputes
 being
 
merely
 verbal.
 I
 consider
 these
 other
 arguments
 to
 be
 more
 important.
 
IV.2
 THE
 USE-­‐THEORY
 ARGUMENT
 
Let
 us
 move
 on
 now
 to
 a
 second
 argument
 for
 the
 view
 that
 philosophical
 S-­‐
disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 This
 is
 an
 argument
 type.
 It
 can
 be
 run
 in
 connection
 
with
 any
 philosophical
 S-­‐dispute.
 I
 will
 give
 a
 version
 of
 the
 argument
 for
 the
 case
 
of
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons
 for
 action.
 A
 similar
 argument
 can
 be
 run
 for
 other
 
terms
 or
 concepts.
 The
 argument
 for
 the
 case
 of
 reasons
 proceeds
 as
 follows:
 
(1) When
 philosophers
 argue
 about
 what
 a
 reason
 is,
 they
 say
 things
 like
 
‘A
 reason
 is
 abc’
 and
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 xyz’,
 where
 abc
 and
 xyz
 are
 theories
 
of
 what
 a
 reason
 is.
 (The
 reader
 can
 think
 about
 the
 abc-­‐theory
 as
 a
 
Humean
 theory
 of
 reasons
 and
 the
 xyz-­‐theory
 as
 a
 non-­‐Humean
 theory
 
of
 reasons,
 but
 all
 that’s
 important
 is
 that
 the
 two
 theories
 are
 
inconsistent
 with
 each
 other.)
 

  110
 
(2) The
 philosopher
 who
 says
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 abc’
 is
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 
according
 to
 the
 abc
 theory;
 and
 the
 philosopher
 who
 says
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 
xyz’
 is
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 according
 to
 the
 xyz
 theory.
 
Therefore,
 
(3) The
 two
 philosophers
 are
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 differently.
 
Moreover,
 it
 seems
 clear
 that,
 
(4) In
 the
 (Hirsch/Manley)
 language
 of
 the
 abc-­‐theorist,
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 
reason
 is
 abc’
 is
 true,
 and
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 xyz’
 is
 false;
 and
 in
 
the
 (Hirsch/Manley)
 language
 of
 the
 xyz-­‐theorist,
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 
reason
 is
 xyz’
 is
 true,
 and
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 abc’
 is
 false.
39

 
Therefore,
 
(5) The
 dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 
Premise
 (1)
 seems
 trivially
 true.
 All
 it
 says
 is
 that
 when
 philosophers
 argue
 about
 
what
 a
 reason
 is,
 they
 give
 theories
 about
 what
 a
 reason
 is.
 Clearly,
 that’s
 what
 
Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 about
 reasons
 are
 doing.
 

  Premise
 (2)
 is
 a
 more
 controversial
 claim.
 I
 think
 there
 are
 two
 
interpretations
 of
 this
 premise
 and
 we
 need
 to
 disambiguate
 before
 moving
 
forward.
 The
 ambiguity
 in
 premise
 (2)
 is
 generated
 by
 an
 ambiguity
 in
 the
 term
 
‘use’.
 On
 one
 sense
 of
 the
 term,
 two
 people
 can
 use
 a
 term
 differently,
 while
 
meaning
 exactly
 the
 same
 thing
 by
 a
 term
 (even
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 sense),
 
because
 of
 some
 difference
 in
 their
 non-­‐linguistic
 beliefs.
 For
 instance,
 two
 
people
 could
 mean
 the
 same
 thing
 by
 the
 term
 ‘bachelor’
 (and
 they
 could
 both
 be
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
39

 The
 Hirsch/Manley
 language
 of
 a
 person
 S
 is
 the
 language
 that
 S
 would
 speak
 if
 
S
 were
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 scenario.
 

  111
 
fully
 competent
 with
 respect
 to
 the
 term
 ‘bachelor’),
 but
 in
 a
 particular
 case,
 one
 
person
 could
 apply
 the
 term
 ‘bachelor’
 and
 the
 other
 could
 refuse
 to
 apply
 it
 
because
 one
 of
 them
 could
 be
 mistaken
 about
 whether
 the
 given
 man
 is
 
unmarried.
 This
 is
 obviously
 an
 irrelevant
 sense
 of
 the
 term
 ‘use’.
 According
 to
 
the
 sense
 of
 the
 term
 ‘use’
 that
 I
 have
 in
 mind
 for
 this
 argument,
 these
 two
 people
 
use
 the
 term
 ‘bachelor’
 in
 the
 same
 way.
 So
 on
 the
 intended
 sense
 of
 the
 term
 
‘use’,
 to
 talk
 about
 how
 someone
 uses
 a
 term
 is
 to
 talk
 about
 her
 most
 
fundamental
 dispositions
 for
 using
 the
 term.
 And
 when
 I
 talk
 about
 someone’s
 
fundamental
 dispositions
 to
 use
 a
 term,
 I
 am
 talking
 about
 something
 that
 is
 
closely
 related
 to
 what
 she
 means
 by
 the
 term
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 sense.
 

  So
 now
 what
 I
 want
 to
 do
 is
 argue
 that
 the
 two
 philosophers
 who
 are
 
arguing
 about
 what
 a
 reason
 is
 in
 premise
 (2)
 are
 using
 (in
 the
 relevant
 sense)
 
the
 term
 ‘reason’
 in
 line
 with
 their
 respective
 theories.
 To
 make
 this
 more
 clear,
 
let’s
 focus
 on
 a
 case
 where
 we
 have
 a
 Humean
 and
 a
 non-­‐Humean
 about
 reasons.
 
My
 claim
 is
 that
 the
 Humean
 uses
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 in
 line
 with
 the
 Humean
 
theory
 of
 reasons,
 and
 the
 non-­‐Humean
 uses
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 in
 line
 with
 the
 
non-­‐Humean
 theory
 of
 reasons.
 My
 argument
 for
 this
 is
 that
 when
 coming
 up
 
with
 a
 theory
 of
 what
 something
 is
 (e.g.,
 what
 a
 reason
 is,
 what
 free
 will
 is,
 what
 
knowledge
 is,
 etc.),
 philosophers
 consult
 their
 own
 personal
 intuitions.
 These
 
intuitions
 are
 reflections
 of
 what
 they
 mean
 by
 the
 term.
 And
 then
 they
 go
 on
 to
 
think
 the
 matter
 through
 in
 a
 philosophically
 informed
 and
 skillful
 way,
 until
 they
 
come
 up
 with
 a
 theory.
 During
 this
 process,
 they
 will
 tinker
 with
 their
 theory
 in
 a
 
very
 detail-­‐oriented
 way,
 with
 the
 purpose
 of
 covering
 all
 their
 bases.
 They
 will
 

  112
 
want
 to
 account
 for
 all
 of
 their
 intuitions,
 or
 if
 there
 are
 some
 less
 important
 
intuitions
 that
 they
 cannot
 account
 for,
 they
 will
 at
 least
 want
 to
 have
 a
 way
 to
 
explain
 those
 intuitions
 away.
 At
 the
 end
 of
 this
 process,
 they
 come
 to
 their
 final
 
considered
 theory.
 It
 would
 be
 surprising,
 to
 say
 the
 least,
 to
 find
 a
 philosopher
 in
 
such
 a
 position
 who
 uses
 the
 term
 (remember,
 in
 the
 relevant
 sense
 of
 ‘use’)
 in
 a
 
way
 that
 goes
 against
 her
 theory.
 Therefore,
 I
 want
 to
 conclude
 that
 these
 
philosophers
 use
 the
 terms
 in
 question
 in
 accordance
 with
 their
 own
 theories.
 
This
 seems
 to
 be
 true
 in
 general
 and
 so
 is
 true
 in
 the
 particular
 case
 of
 the
 dispute
 
about
 reasons.
 Therefore,
 premise
 (2)
 is
 true.
 

  I
 will
 consider
 objections
 to
 premise
 (2)
 below,
 but
 first,
 I
 want
 to
 
continue
 arguing
 for
 the
 premises
 in
 the
 above
 argument
 and
 complete
 my
 
positive
 argument
 for
 the
 conclusion.
 

  Premise
 (3)
 follows
 from
 premises
 (1)
 and
 (2),
 so
 I
 will
 move
 on
 now
 to
 
premise
 (4).
 My
 argument
 for
 (4)
 is
 that
 in
 the
 (Hirsch/Manley)
 language
 of
 the
 
abc-­‐theorist,
 the
 word
 ‘reason’
 means
 what
 the
 abc-­‐theorist
 means
 (in
 the
 
Hirsch/Manley
 sense)
 by
 the
 word
 ‘reason’.
 But
 I
 just
 argued
 when
 talking
 about
 
premise
 (2)
 that
 what
 the
 abc-­‐theorist
 means
 by
 the
 word
 ‘reason’
 is
 in
 line
 with
 
the
 abc
 theory.
 But
 the
 abc
 theory
 says
 that
 a
 reason
 is
 abc.
 So
 in
 the
 
Hirsch/Manley
 language
 of
 the
 abc-­‐theorist,
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 abc’
 is
 a
 
trivial
 truth.
 For
 similar
 reasons,
 we
 can
 conclude
 that
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 
xyz’
 is
 trivially
 false
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 language
 of
 the
 abc-­‐theorist.
 Moreover,
 
we
 can
 run
 the
 same
 argument
 for
 the
 xyz-­‐theorist
 to
 show
 that
 in
 her
 language,
 

  113
 
the
 sentence
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 xyz’
 is
 trivially
 true,
 and
 the
 sentence
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 abc’
 is
 
trivially
 false.
 

  Lastly,
 to
 get
 from
 premises
 (3)
 and
 (4)
 to
 the
 conclusion,
 (5),
 I
 would
 just
 
point
 out
 that
 there
 does
 not
 seem
 to
 be
 anything
 more
 to
 a
 merely
 verbal
 
dispute
 than
 the
 parties
 meaning
 different
 things
 by
 the
 disputed
 sentences
 (as
 
we
 have
 in
 premise
 (3))
 and
 the
 disputed
 sentences
 coming
 out
 true
 in
 the
 
language
 of
 the
 disputant
 who
 thinks
 they
 are
 true
 and
 false
 in
 the
 language
 of
 
the
 disputant
 who
 thinks
 they
 are
 false
 (as
 we
 have
 in
 premise
 (4)).
 So
 (5)
 is
 true.
 

  Let
 us
 consider
 two
 objections
 to
 the
 above
 argument
 for
 (5).
 The
 first
 
objection
 can
 be
 put
 like
 this:
 
Premises
 (2)
 and
 (4)
 rely
 on
 the
 claim
 that
 each
 disputant
 says
 something
 
trivial
 in
 her
 own
 language
 when
 stating
 her
 theory
 of
 what
 a
 reason
 is.
 
But
 it
 seems
 that
 in
 philosophical
 disputes
 such
 as
 this,
 philosophers
 
intend
 to
 be
 making
 controversial
 claims.
 Philosophers
 spend
 a
 great
 deal
 
of
 time
 writing
 and
 speaking
 about
 this
 sort
 of
 dispute
 because
 they
 
intend
 to
 be
 disagreeing
 with
 other
 philosophers.
 But
 this
 could
 not
 be
 
consistent
 with
 the
 sentences
 being
 trivially
 true
 in
 their
 own
 languages.
 
Firstly,
 it
 is
 not
 clear
 at
 all
 that
 I
 need
 to
 respond
 to
 this
 objection.
 This
 objection
 
is
 really
 just
 the
 paradox
 of
 analysis,
 which
 is
 a
 problem
 for
 everyone.
 I
 bear
 no
 
special
 burden
 with
 respect
 to
 that
 issue.
 However,
 let
 me
 briefly
 respond.
 In
 
order
 for
 the
 objection
 to
 really
 hit
 home,
 the
 intention
 to
 say
 something
 
controversial,
 or
 to
 disagree,
 would
 need
 to
 be
 a
 primary
 intention
 of
 the
 
philosopher.
 That
 is,
 it
 would
 need
 to
 be
 quite
 weighty.
 But
 it
 seems
 as
 though,
 in
 

  114
 
this
 sort
 of
 case,
 this
 intention
 is
 a
 more
 of
 a
 secondary
 intention.
 It
 seems
 to
 me
 
that
 this
 intention
 is
 not
 essential;
 it
 does
 not
 seem
 to
 be
 the
 sort
 of
 intention
 that
 
would
 determine
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 language
 of
 the
 disputant.
 In
 fact,
 it
 seems
 
like
 an
 intention
 that
 we
 can
 imagine
 the
 philosophers
 in
 question
 dropping
 as
 
soon
 as
 they
 became
 sympathetic
 to
 the
 possibility
 of
 a
 merely
 verbal
 diagnosis.
 I
 
do
 not
 mean
 to
 deny
 that
 there
 will
 be
 an
 important
 sense
 in
 which
 the
 correct
 
theory
 of
 what
 a
 reason
 is
 will
 be
 simultaneously
 trivial
 and
 controversial,
 or
 
non-­‐obvious.
 But
 I
 have
 no
 special
 obligation
 to
 explain
 how
 this
 is
 possible,
 
given
 that
 it
 is
 a
 problem
 for
 everyone.
 

  The
 second
 objection
 to
 the
 above
 argument
 for
 the
 claim
 that
 
philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal
 is
 also
 an
 objection
 to
 premises
 (2)
 
and
 (4).
 It
 goes
 like
 this:
 
Philosophers
 intend
 to
 mean
 what
 we
 all
 mean
 when
 using
 the
 central
 
terms
 of
 their
 S-­‐disputes,
 e.g.,
 ‘reason’,
 ‘free
 will’,
 ‘knowledge’,
 etc.
 So
 
consider
 a
 case
 in
 which
 a
 Humean
 says,
 “A
 reason
 is
 abc.”
 The
 most
 
charitable
 interpretation
 of
 the
 Humean’s
 use
 of
 the
 word
 ‘reason’
 here
 is
 
not
 the
 one
 that
 takes
 its
 meaning
 to
 be
 dictated
 by
 the
 abc-­‐theory.
 The
 
most
 charitable
 interpretation
 is,
 rather,
 one
 that
 takes
 ‘a
 reason’
 to
 mean
 
this:
 an
 instance
 of
 the
 kind
 (or
 the
 concept)
 that
 we
 all
 pick
 out
 with
 the
 
term
 ‘reason’,
 whatever
 that
 kind
 (or
 concept)
 ends
 up
 being.
 If
 this
 is
 what
 
the
 Humean
 means,
 and
 if
 this
 is
 also
 what
 the
 non-­‐Humean
 means
 when
 
she
 says,
 “A
 reason
 is
 xyz”,
 then
 when
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 assert
 

  115
 
their
 theories,
 they
 are
 using
 ‘reason’
 in
 the
 same
 way.
 And
 so
 they
 are
 not
 
talking
 past
 each
 other,
 and
 the
 dispute
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal.
 
I
 am
 going
 to
 hold
 off
 on
 giving
 my
 response
 to
 this
 objection
 until
 after
 I
 give
 and
 
discuss
 the
 next
 argument
 for
 S-­‐disputes
 being
 merely
 verbal.
 My
 discussion
 
there
 will
 make
 it
 very
 easy
 to
 respond
 to
 this
 objection.
 
IV.3
 THE
 S-­‐DISPUTE
 NEIGHBORHOOD
 ARGUMENT
 
Here’s
 another
 argument
 for
 the
 conclusion
 that
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 
merely
 verbal:
 
(1) The
 only
 disputes
 in
 the
 neighborhood
 of
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 that
 are
 
not
 merely
 verbal
 are
 disputes
 that
 are
 about
 meaning.
 
(2) When
 philosophers
 are
 engaged
 in
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes,
 their
 disputes
 
are
 not
 about
 meaning.
 
Therefore,
 
 
(3) Philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 verbal.
 
Let
 me
 start
 by
 arguing
 for
 premise
 (1).
 Here
 is
 a
 dispute
 that
 is
 in
 the
 
neighborhood
 of
 the
 philosophical
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons
 (for
 action).
 Imagine
 a
 
Humean
 and
 a
 non-­‐Humean,
 each
 with
 his
 own
 conception
 of
 what
 it
 is
 to
 be
 a
 
reason.
 In
 other
 words,
 the
 Humean
 has
 a
 Humean
 conception,
 and
 the
 non-­‐
Humean
 has
 a
 non-­‐Humean
 conception.
 Now
 imagine
 that
 they
 get
 into
 a
 dispute
 
about
 which
 conception
 is
 picked
 out
 by
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 in
 English.
 In
 other
 
words,
 they
 are
 arguing
 about
 what
 the
 word
 ‘reason’
 means
 in
 English.
 This
 is
 
clearly
 a
 debate
 about
 semantics,
 and
 in
 a
 very
 real
 sense
 it
 is
 a
 substantive
 
dispute.
 It
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal,
 though.
 It
 is
 clearly
 “about
 words”,
 or
 “just
 

  116
 
semantics”,
 but
 it
 is
 intended
 to
 be
 about
 words
 and
 semantics
 and
 the
 disputants
 
do
 not
 take
 themselves
 to
 be
 doing
 anything
 else.
 Moreover,
 when
 they
 saying
 
things
 like,
 “The
 word
 ‘reason’
 means
 abc,”
 they
 are
 not
 using
 any
 of
 these
 words
 
differently
 from
 one
 another.
 Also,
 notice
 that
 they
 are
 not
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 
when
 they
 say
 things
 like
 this;
 they
 are
 mentioning
 it.
 And
 when
 they
 mention
 the
 
term
 ‘reason’,
 they
 mean
 the
 same
 thing
 as
 the
 other
 person
 (even
 in
 the
 
Hirsch/Manley
 sense);
 in
 particular,
 they
 are
 using
 “‘reason’”
 to
 denote
 the
 word
 
‘reason’.
 And
 this
 is
 why
 the
 debate
 is
 not
 merely
 verbal
 in
 the
 relevant
 sense.
 
Before
 moving
 on,
 I
 want
 to
 make
 something
 clear.
 The
 above
 dispute
 
about
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 seems
 to
 be
 different
 from
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 
about
 reasons.
 It
 is
 obviously
 importantly
 related
 to
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons,
 
but
 I
 think
 we
 can
 think
 of
 them
 as
 separate
 disputes.
 I
 will
 return
 to
 this
 issue
 
below,
 but
 first
 I
 want
 to
 complete
 my
 argument
 for
 premise
 (1).
 
In
 order
 to
 complete
 my
 argument
 for
 premise
 (1),
 I
 need
 to
 argue
 that
 on
 
any
 way
 of
 characterizing
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 itself
 (the
 one
 that
 philosophers
 are
 
actually
 having,
 not
 the
 dispute
 that
 is
 about
 meaning),
 that
 dispute
 is
 merely
 
verbal.
 For
 instance,
 one
 might
 characterize
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons
 as
 being
 
about
 the
 nature
 of
 reasons
 themselves.
 On
 this
 characterization,
 there
 may
 be
 no
 
mention
 of
 meaning
 or
 semantics
 or
 the
 term
 ‘reason’.
 Rather,
 the
 
characterization
 would
 consist
 entirely
 of
 object-­‐level
 talk
 of
 reasons.
 In
 fact,
 this
 
is
 the
 most
 natural
 and
 intuitive
 way
 to
 characterize
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes.
 But
 
notice
 that
 when
 philosophers
 characterize
 the
 dispute
 in
 this
 way,
 we
 are
 using
 
the
 term
 ‘reason’
 and
 not
 mentioning
 it.
 As
 we
 have
 already
 seen,
 however,
 when
 

  117
 
the
 two
 disputants
 are
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’,
 they
 are
 using
 it
 in
 a
 way
 that
 fits
 
with
 their
 theory
 of
 what
 a
 reason
 is.
 In
 other
 words,
 the
 Humean
 uses
 it
 in
 
accordance
 with
 the
 Humean
 theory,
 and
 the
 non-­‐Humean
 uses
 it
 in
 accordance
 
with
 the
 non-­‐Humean
 theory.
 But
 this
 means
 that
 they
 are
 using
 the
 term
 
differently,
 or
 that
 they
 mean
 different
 things
 by
 the
 term
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 
sense.
 And
 so,
 on
 the
 above
 characterization
 of
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons,
 it
 is
 
merely
 verbal.
 

  Similar
 things
 can
 be
 said
 with
 respect
 to
 other
 characterizations
 of
 the
 S-­‐
dispute
 about
 reasons.
 No
 matter
 how
 you
 characterize
 that
 dispute,
 insofar
 as
 
the
 characterization
 takes
 the
 disputants
 to
 be
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’,
 instead
 of
 
mentioning
 it,
 the
 dispute
 will
 be
 merely
 verbal
 according
 to
 that
 
characterization.
 The
 only
 way
 to
 avoid
 this
 result
 is
 to
 characterize
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 
about
 reasons
 in
 such
 a
 way
 that
 the
 disputants
 are
 only
 mentioning
 the
 term
 
‘reason’,
 and
 not
 using
 it.
 But
 if
 we
 do
 that,
 then
 we
 are
 taking
 the
 dispute
 to
 be
 
the
 dispute
 described
 above,
 i.e.,
 the
 dispute
 that
 is
 about
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 
term
 ‘reason’.
 But
 now
 we
 are
 talking
 about
 a
 different
 dispute.
 As
 I
 said
 earlier,
 
the
 dispute
 that
 is
 about
 the
 meaning
 of
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 does
 not
 seem
 to
 be
 
identical
 with
 the
 philosophical
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons.
40

 But
 this
 claim
 is
 
controversial,
 and
 I
 need
 to
 argue
 for
 it.
 This
 takes
 us
 to
 premise
 (2)
 of
 the
 
argument,
 because
 that
 premise
 just
 says
 that
 when
 philosophers
 are
 engaged
 in
 
philosophical
 S-­‐disputes,
 their
 disputes
 are
 not
 about
 meaning.
 

 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
40

 Don’t
 get
 me
 wrong.
 I
 think
 the
 dispute
 that
 is
 explicitly
 about
 meaning
 very
 
well
 might
 be
 what
 the
 disputants
 should
 shift
 to.
 That
 is,
 that
 might
 be
 the
 most
 
productive
 course
 of
 action.
 But
 it
 seems
 to
 be
 a
 different
 dispute.
 

  118
 

  At
 a
 glance,
 premise
 (2)
 seems
 obvious.
 When
 you
 look
 at
 the
 work
 of
 
philosophers
 who
 are
 engaged
 in
 S-­‐disputes
 about
 reasons,
 they
 seem,
 mainly,
 to
 
be
 talking
 about
 reasons
 and
 not
 the
 term
 ‘reason’.
 This
 is
 not
 to
 say
 that
 they
 
never
 mention
 the
 term
 ‘reason’,
 but
 it
 is
 certainly
 not
 the
 only
 (or
 even
 primary)
 
thing
 that
 they
 do.
 They
 seem
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 much
 more
 than
 they
 
mention
 it.
 Moreover,
 if
 you
 ask
 philosophers
 who
 engage
 in
 S-­‐disputes
 if
 their
 
dispute
 is
 just
 about
 meaning,
 they
 will
 generally
 answer
 in
 the
 negative,
 and
 it
 
seems
 charitable
 to
 assume
 that
 they
 know
 what
 they
 are
 doing.
 
However,
 there
 is
 an
 objection
 that
 one
 might
 raise
 about
 this
 argument
 
for
 premise
 (2).
 One
 might
 think
 that
 philosophers
 can
 both
 explicitly
 and
 
implicitly
 do
 semantics.
 To
 explicitly
 do
 semantics,
 is
 to
 explicitly
 mention
 terms
 
and
 attempt
 to
 identify
 their
 meanings.
 To
 implicitly
 do
 semantics,
 perhaps,
 is
 to
 
engage
 in
 disputes
 in
 which
 one
 is
 somehow
 building
 mentions
 of
 the
 relevant
 
terms
 into
 what
 one
 is
 saying
 (without
 explicitly
 mentioning
 the
 terms).
 So,
 if
 
philosophers
 engaged
 in
 an
 S-­‐dispute
 about
 reasons
 were
 implicitly
 doing
 
semantics,
 they
 would
 be
 conveying
 (either
 by
 building
 it
 into
 the
 meanings
 of
 
their
 terms
 or
 by
 building
 it
 into
 what
 is
 pragmatically
 conveyed)
 meta-­‐linguistic
 
claims
 about
 the
 term
 ‘reason’.
 In
 fact,
 one
 might
 claim,
 this
 is
 exactly
 what
 is
 
going
 on
 when
 philosophers
 engage
 in
 S-­‐disputes.
 The
 philosophers
 are
 actually
 
arguing
 over
 what
 the
 correct
 meanings
 of
 the
 central
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute
 are.
 
The
 meta-­‐linguistic
 claims
 that
 they
 would
 be
 conveying,
 on
 such
 a
 picture,
 might
 
be
 about,
 say,
 the
 terms
 ‘reason’
 (or
 ‘free
 will’,
 or
 knowledge’,
 etc.)
 and
 what
 its
 
meaning
 is.
 But,
 again,
 this
 seems
 implausible
 to
 me.
 The
 objection
 relies
 on
 

  119
 
philosophers
 being
 unaware
 of
 the
 fact
 that
 they
 are
 doing
 semantics,
 even
 if
 the
 
semantics
 that
 they
 are
 supposedly
 doing
 is
 under
 the
 surface
 in
 some
 sense.
 And
 
that
 just
 seems
 to
 be
 too
 uncharitable
 of
 a
 view
 to
 take,
 given
 the
 precision
 and
 
attention
 with
 which
 philosophers
 habitually
 use
 language.
 
What
 is
 plausible
 is
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 track
 the
 process
 of
 doing
 semantics.
 
That
 is,
 it
 does
 seem
 that
 if
 I
 am
 correct
 about
 S-­‐disputes,
 there
 is
 some
 sense
 in
 
which
 philosophers
 are
 going
 through
 many
 of
 the
 motions
 that
 they
 might
 go
 
through
 were
 they
 intending
 to
 do
 semantics
 on
 the
 central
 terms
 of
 their
 
disputes.
 However,
 they
 do
 not
 engage
 in
 what
 I
 take
 to
 be
 an
 essential
 part
 of
 
doing
 semantics;
 mentioning
 terms
 and
 intending
 to
 identify
 their
 meanings.
 So,
 
even
 though
 the
 process
 of
 engaging
 in
 an
 S-­‐dispute
 looks
 similar,
 in
 certain
 
interesting
 ways,
 to
 the
 process
 of
 purposefully
 identifying
 the
 meanings
 of
 the
 
terms,
 it
 is
 not
 the
 same
 thing.
 
A
 second
 argument
 for
 premise
 (2)
 is
 that
 philosophers
 often
 do
 semantics
 
in
 a
 very
 explicit
 way.
 They
 often
 talk
 about
 the
 semantics
 of
 various
 terms
 (e.g.,
 
proper
 names,
 natural
 kind
 terms,
 moral
 terms,
 etc.),
 and
 when
 they
 do
 this,
 they
 
are
 very
 clear
 that
 that
 is
 what
 they
 are
 doing.
 They
 do
 not
 use
 terms
 that
 they
 
are
 trying
 to
 mention,
 and
 they
 very
 explicitly
 consider
 different
 candidates
 for
 
the
 meanings
 of
 the
 terms
 in
 question.
 Therefore,
 when
 philosophers
 are
 engaged
 
in
 S-­‐disputes,
 and
 using
 the
 relevant
 terms
 instead
 of
 mentioning
 them,
 and
 not
 
making
 any
 explicit
 reference
 to
 meanings,
 it
 again
 seems
 charitable
 to
 assume
 
that
 they
 are
 not
 talking
 about
 the
 meanings
 of
 the
 terms.
 

  120
 

  This
 concludes
 the
 formulation
 of
 the
 positive
 argument
 of
 this
 section.
 
However,
 I
 now
 want
 to
 return
 to
 the
 objection
 that
 I
 passed
 over
 at
 the
 end
 of
 
the
 last
 section,
 because
 that
 objection
 is
 relevant
 to
 the
 argument
 of
 this
 section
 
as
 well.
 In
 that
 objection,
 it
 was
 suggested
 that
 when
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 
state
 their
 theories,
 they
 are
 using
 the
 term
 ‘a
 reason’
 to
 mean
 an
 instance
 of
 the
 
kind
 (or
 the
 concept)
 that
 we
 all
 pick
 out
 with
 the
 term
 ‘reason’,
 whatever
 that
 kind
 
(or
 concept)
 ends
 up
 being.
 

  If
 this
 were
 right,
 then
 the
 Humean
 and
 the
 non-­‐Humean
 would
 really
 be
 
doing
 semantics.
 Because
 built
 into
 the
 way
 they
 are
 using
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 is
 an
 
implicit
 mention
 of
 the
 term.
 In
 other
 words,
 when
 they
 seem
 to
 be
 using
 the
 
term,
 they
 would
 really
 be
 mentioning
 the
 term.
 But
 I
 just
 argued
 that
 it
 is
 
implausible
 to
 interpret
 philosophers
 this
 way
 because
 it
 is
 uncharitable
 to
 
assume
 that
 they
 are
 that
 careless
 with
 their
 language.
 Again,
 philosophers
 are
 
very
 used
 to
 doing
 semantics,
 and
 when
 they
 do
 so,
 they
 are
 very
 clear
 about
 it.
 It
 
would
 be
 uncharitable
 to
 take
 philosophers
 who
 are
 engaged
 in
 S-­‐disputes
 to
 be
 
doing
 semantics
 without
 realizing
 it.
 It
 is
 actually
 difficult
 to
 think
 of
 any
 field
 in
 
which
 people
 are
 more
 careful
 about
 their
 use
 of
 language
 than
 in
 philosophy.
 

  Also,
 another
 response
 to
 the
 objection
 raised
 at
 the
 end
 of
 section
 IV.2
 is
 
that
 even
 if
 philosophers
 who
 are
 engaged
 in
 S-­‐disputes
 have
 the
 intention
 of
 
meaning
 by
 their
 terms
 what
 we
 all
 do,
 we
 can
 ignore
 that
 intention
 and
 still
 put
 
them
 in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 scenario.
 (The
 Hirsch/Manley
 scenario
 already
 
involves
 us
 ignoring
 major
 factors
 in
 the
 determination
 of
 the
 meanings
 of
 terms
 
in
 the
 public
 language,
 namely,
 the
 influence
 of
 other
 people.
 I
 see
 know
 reason
 

  121
 
why,
 if
 we
 can
 do
 that,
 we
 cannot
 ignore
 some
 specific
 intention
 inside
 of
 the
 
head
 of
 some
 relevant
 speaker.)
 And
 once
 we
 do
 that,
 they
 will
 mean
 different
 
things
 by
 sentence
 with
 the
 relevant
 terms.
 
IV.4
 
 
In
 this
 section,
 I
 will
 give
 my
 fourth
 and
 final
 argument
 for
 philosophical
 S-­‐
disputes
 being
 merely
 verbal.
 I
 will
 focus
 on
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 between
 Humeans
 and
 
non-­‐Humeans
 about
 reasons,
 but
 this
 sort
 of
 argument
 should
 be
 able
 to
 be
 run
 
for
 all
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes.
 The
 argument
 goes
 as
 follows:
 
(1) Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 about
 reasons
 can
 agree
 on
 all
 the
 relevant
 
facts
 except
 for
 the
 necessary
 and
 sufficient
 conditions
 for
 inclusion
 in
 the
 
category
 of
 reasons.
 
(2) Disagreeing
 (in
 some
 really
 strong
 way)
 on
 the
 necessary
 and
 sufficient
 
conditions
 for
 inclusion
 in
 the
 category
 of
 reasons
 is
 equivalent
 to
 having
 
different
 dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘reason’.
 
Therefore,
 
(3) Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 about
 reasons
 can
 agree
 on
 all
 the
 relevant
 
facts
 but
 differ
 with
 respect
 to
 their
 dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘reason’.
 
(4) Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 disagree
 about
 the
 truth-­‐values
 of
 the
 
sentences
 that
 are
 central
 to
 their
 dispute,
 e.g.,
 sentences
 like
 ‘A
 reason
 is
 
necessarily
 related
 to
 some
 desire
 (or
 other
 psychological
 state)
 of
 the
 
relevant
 agent.’
 
(5) Given
 premise
 (3),
 the
 only
 way
 to
 account
 for
 the
 fact
 that
 Humeans
 and
 
non-­‐Humeans
 disagree
 about
 the
 truth-­‐values
 of
 the
 sentences
 mentioned
 

  122
 
in
 premise
 (4)
 is
 to
 say
 that
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 mean
 different
 
things
 (in
 the
 Hirsch/Manley
 sense)
 by
 these
 sentences
 and,
 so,
 the
 
dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 
Therefore,
 
(6) The
 debate
 between
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 about
 what
 reasons
 are
 
is
 merely
 verbal.
 
Let
 me
 start
 by
 arguing
 for
 premise
 (1).
 It
 is
 difficult
 to
 see
 what
 else
 they
 
disagree
 about,
 aside
 from
 the
 conditions
 for
 inclusion
 in
 the
 category
 of
 reasons.
 
(This
 does
 not
 mean
 that
 there
 are
 not
 other
 ways
 of
 characterizing
 the
 
disagreement.
 For
 instance,
 again,
 it
 is
 also
 accurate
 to
 say
 that
 they
 disagree
 
about
 the
 nature
 of
 reasons.
 But
 this
 seems
 to
 be
 just
 another
 way
 of
 saying,
 
basically,
 the
 same
 thing
 about
 the
 dispute.)
 Uncontroversially,
 Humeans
 and
 
non-­‐Humeans
 agree
 on
 the
 fact
 that
 people
 have
 desires
 (or
 other
 important
 
psychological
 states)
 that
 can
 be
 better
 or
 worse
 served
 by
 different
 types
 of
 
actions
 in
 different
 types
 of
 situations.
 Of
 course,
 they
 might
 disagree
 about
 the
 
ontology
 -­‐-­‐
 whether
 non-­‐Humean
 reasons
 exist
 at
 all
 -­‐-­‐
 but
 they
 do
 not
 need
 to
 
disagree
 about
 this.
 Humeans
 can
 say
 that
 there
 are
 non-­‐Humean
 reasons
 
(without
 thinking
 that
 they
 are
 reasons
 –
 that
 is,
 without
 thinking
 that
 they
 are
 
actually
 what
 is
 picked
 out
 by
 our
 term
 ‘reason’),
 and
 one
 can
 endorse
 a
 non-­‐
Humean
 theory
 of
 what
 reasons
 would
 need
 to
 be
 were
 they
 to
 exist
 without
 
believing
 that
 they
 do
 exist.
 (I
 do
 not
 want
 to
 get
 caught
 up
 in
 whether
 or
 not
 
such
 a
 view
 should
 be
 called
 non-­‐Humean.
 It
 seems
 like
 a
 plausible
 
categorization,
 but
 arguing
 over
 the
 label
 is
 not
 necessary.)
 Also,
 it
 is
 not
 clear
 

  123
 
that
 a
 disagreement
 about
 the
 existence
 of
 non-­‐Humeans
 reasons
 is
 relevant
 to
 
the
 disagreement
 over
 what
 reasons
 are.
 
 

  Premise
 (2)
 seems
 obvious.
 Clearly,
 the
 conditions
 tracked
 by
 their
 
dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 might
 be
 most
 naturally
 framed
 
linguistically,
 and
 the
 inclusion
 conditions
 for
 the
 category
 of
 reasons
 might
 most
 
naturally
 be
 framed
 non-­‐linguistically,
 but
 the
 conditions
 will
 be
 essentially
 
equivalent.
 

  Premise
 (3)
 follows
 from
 premises
 (1)
 and
 (2).
 Premise
 (4)
 is
 trivially
 
true,
 so
 all
 that
 remains
 is
 to
 argue
 for
 premise
 (5).
 But
 premise
 (5)
 is
 not
 a
 very
 
bold
 claim.
 If
 Humeans
 and
 non-­‐Humeans
 can
 really
 agree
 on
 all
 the
 relevant
 
facts,
 only
 differing
 in
 their
 dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘reason’,
 that
 is
 
analogous
 to
 the
 football
 case,
 where
 the
 Briton
 and
 the
 American
 agree
 on
 all
 
the
 relevant
 facts
 but
 differ
 in
 their
 dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘football’.
 So
 if
 
the
 Humean
 and
 the
 non-­‐Humean
 engaged
 in
 the
 S-­‐dispute
 still
 disagree
 on
 the
 
truth-­‐values
 of
 the
 relevant
 sentences,
 it
 seems
 that
 we
 have
 no
 choice
 but
 to
 
explain
 their
 disagreement
 by
 reference
 to
 the
 difference
 between
 their
 
dispositions
 to
 use
 the
 term
 ‘reason’.
 But
 this
 is
 just
 to
 say
 that
 we
 have
 to
 explain
 
the
 disagreement
 by
 appeal
 to
 the
 different
 ways
 in
 which
 they
 use
 (in
 the
 
Hirsch/Manley
 sense)
 the
 term
 ‘reason’
 (or
 the
 different
 things
 they
 mean,
 in
 the
 
Hirsch/Manley
 sense,
 by
 sentences
 containing
 the
 term).
 And
 if
 that
 is
 correct,
 
then
 their
 dispute
 is
 merely
 verbal.
 

 

 

  124
 
V.
 S-­‐DISPUTES
 AND
 PARASITIC
 ONTOLOGICAL
 DISPUTES
 
One
 might
 wonder
 if
 ontological
 disputes
 might
 be
 parasitically
 merely
 verbal.
 
The
 idea
 here
 would
 be
 that
 the
 mere
 verbalness
 of
 some
 S-­‐disputes
 might
 be
 
such
 that
 they
 infect
 nearby
 ontological
 disputes.
 For
 instance,
 take
 an
 S-­‐dispute
 
about
 the
 term
 ‘object’.
 Two
 philosophers
 might
 have
 different
 notions
 of
 what
 it
 
takes
 to
 count
 as
 an
 object.
 Jones
 thinks
 that
 an
 object
 needs
 to
 be
 an
 ordinary
 
object
 (such
 as
 a
 baseball,
 toaster,
 cup,
 etc)
 while
 Smith
 might
 think
 that
 the
 term
 
‘object’
 applies
 to
 ordinary
 objects
 and
 extraordinary
 objects
 (such
 as
 
mereological
 sums).
 
 If
 Jones
 and
 Smith
 disagree
 about
 what
 it
 takes
 to
 be
 an
 
object,
 then
 surely
 they
 are
 going
 to
 come
 across
 cases
 in
 which
 they
 have
 
opposing
 intuitions
 as
 to
 whether
 or
 not
 something
 (broadly
 construed
 so
 as
 to
 
not
 be
 necessarily
 an
 object)
 counts
 as
 an
 object.
 For
 example,
 if
 they
 find
 
themselves
 in
 front
 of
 a
 table
 with
 two
 ordinary
 objects
 on
 it,
 a
 baseball
 and
 a
 
toaster,
 then
 Jones
 will
 think
 that
 there
 are
 only
 two
 objects
 and
 Smith
 will
 think
 
that
 there
 are
 three
 (the
 two
 ordinary
 objects
 and
 the
 mereological
 sum
 
composed
 of
 those
 two
 objects).
 But
 this
 disagreement
 between
 them
 looks
 to
 be
 
generated
 by
 their
 disagreement
 about
 what
 it
 is
 to
 be
 an
 object.
 And
 insofar
 as
 it
 
looks
 to
 be
 merely
 verbal,
 which
 it
 does,
 it
 seems
 obvious
 that
 its
 mere
 
verbalness
 comes
 from
 their
 S-­‐dispute
 over
 ‘object’.
 Thus,
 ontological
 disputes
 
can,
 in
 certain
 instances,
 be
 parasitically
 merely
 verbal.
 

  The
 fact
 that
 in
 some
 instances
 ontological
 disputes
 can
 be
 parasitically
 
merely
 verbal
 does
 not
 contradict
 Balauger’s
 conclusion
 that
 ontological
 disputes
 
are
 not
 metaphysically
 merely
 verbal.
 It
 just
 shows
 that
 sometimes
 some
 

  125
 
instances
 of
 ontological
 disputes
 can
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 But
 we
 do
 not
 need
 to
 
look
 for
 parasitical
 examples
 to
 find
 merely
 verbal
 ontological
 disputes.
 As
 
discussed
 above,
 instances
 of
 ontological
 disputes
 between
 philosophers
 can
 in
 
fact
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 (Instances
 of
 almost
 any
 kind
 of
 disputes
 can,
 most
 likely.)
 
It
 is
 not
 clear
 that
 anybody
 would
 want
 to
 deny
 that.
 What
 Balaguer
 (and
 Eklund)
 
points
 out
 is
 that
 it
 is
 not
 the
 case
 that
 they
 must
 be
 merely
 verbal.
 And
 it
 is
 that
 
sort
 of
 strong
 (or
 metaphysical,
 in
 Balauger’s
 terminology)
 mere
 verbalism
 that
 
Hirsch
 is
 in
 favor
 of.
 Furthermore,
 Balaguer’s
 argument
 in
 this
 chapter
 works
 
against
 strong
 (or
 metaphysical)
 mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 
because
 he
 identifies
 a
 way
 to
 locate
 a
 non-­‐verbal
 dispute
 in
 the
 neighborhood
 of
 
any
 ontological
 dispute.
 
VI.
 CONCLUSION
 
The
 above
 arguments
 in
 this
 chapter
 are
 intended
 to
 persuade
 the
 reader
 that
 a
 
certain
 kind
 of
 philosophical
 I-­‐dispute
 and
 all
 philosophical
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 merely
 
verbal.
 I
 understand
 that
 this
 is
 a
 bold
 pair
 of
 conclusions.
 Again,
 I
 expect
 the
 
conclusion
 about
 I-­‐disputes
 to
 be
 easier
 for
 the
 reader
 to
 sympathize
 with
 than
 
the
 conclusion
 about
 S-­‐disputes.
 And
 I
 take
 both
 conclusions
 to
 be
 interesting
 and
 
interestingly
 related
 to
 each
 other.
 But
 the
 conclusion
 about
 S-­‐disputes
 cuts
 
deeper
 and
 is
 more
 philosophically
 interesting
 than
 the
 former
 conclusion.
 It
 is
 a
 
more
 deflationary
 view,
 given
 its
 level
 of
 generality
 and
 the
 fact
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 
are
 generally
 taken
 more
 seriously
 in
 philosophy
 than
 I-­‐disputes.
 This
 is
 not
 to
 
say
 that
 I-­‐disputes
 are
 not
 important
 or
 interesting.
 But
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 more
 

  126
 
likely
 to
 be
 thought
 of
 by
 as
 the
 kind
 of
 dispute
 that
 it
 is
 worth
 having.
 And
 the
 
deflation
 of
 these
 disputes
 runs
 counter
 to
 that
 sense.
 

  Finally,
 I
 believe
 I
 have
 located
 a
 sort
 of
 middle
 version
 of
 mere
 verbalism,
 
between
 purely
 historical
 mere
 verbalism
 and
 purely
 metaphysical
 mere
 
verbalism
 (to
 use
 Balaguer’s
 terminology).
 I
 have
 argued
 that
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 
generally
 historically
 merely
 verbal
 (that
 is,
 they
 have
 often
 been
 merely
 verbal
 
and
 that
 their
 mere
 verbalness
 is
 contingent)
 and
 –
 in
 the
 cases
 in
 which
 they
 are
 
not
 merely
 verbal
 –
 they
 are
 merely
 about
 semantics.
 If
 we
 were
 to
 apply
 
Ballaguer’s
 matrix
 to
 S-­‐disputes,
 the
 only
 substantive
 dispute
 in
 the
 
neighborhood
 of
 any
 S-­‐dispute
 is
 going
 to
 be
 one
 about
 the
 semantics
 of
 the
 
central
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute.
 
So
 either
 way,
 the
 S-­‐disputes
 are
 verbal
 in
 some
 intuitive
 sense.
 This
 is
 an
 
interesting
 conclusion
 because
 if
 it
 is
 correct,
 then
 a
 significant
 type
 of
 dispute
 
that
 is
 often
 had
 in
 philosophy
 is
 deflated
 in
 one
 way
 or
 the
 other.
 In
 the
 cases
 in
 
which
 they
 are
 merely
 verbal,
 they
 are
 shown
 to
 not
 be
 legitimate
 disputes.
 In
 the
 
cases
 in
 which
 they
 are
 shown
 to
 be
 semantic
 disputes,
 they
 are
 shown
 to
 be
 
other
 than
 what
 they
 are
 generally
 perceived
 to
 be.
 Many
 philosophers
 would
 be
 
okay
 to
 learn
 or
 be
 told
 that
 they
 disputes
 that
 they
 care
 about
 are
 just
 disputes
 
over
 the
 semantics
 of
 the
 terms
 of
 the
 dispute.
 But
 many
 philosophers
 would
 feel
 
unsatisfied
 by
 such
 a
 result.
 Many
 take
 themselves
 to
 be
 doing
 something
 more
 
than
 (or
 at
 least
 other
 than)
 just
 figuring
 out
 the
 meanings
 of
 philosophically
 
interesting
 terms.
 

  127
 
This
 position
 is
 different
 from
 Balaguer
 who
 argues
 against
 metaphysical
 
mere
 verbalism
 about
 ontological
 disputes
 by
 locating
 a
 substantive
 dispute
 in
 the
 
neighborhood
 that
 is
 not
 merely
 about
 semantics
 and
 is
 the
 sort
 of
 dispute
 that
 
philosophers
 tend
 to
 want
 to
 be
 having.
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  128
 
BIBLIOGRAPHY
 –
 

 
Bennett,
 Karen
 (2009).
 “Composition,
 Colocation,
 and
 Metaontology”,
 in
 
Metametaphysics:
 New
 Essays
 on
 the
 Foundations
 of
 Ontology,
 Oxford.
 Chalmers,
 
D.,
 Manley,
 D.,
 Wasserman,
 R.
 (eds.).
 

 
Broad,
 C.D.
 (1952)
 “Determinism,
 Indeterminism,
 and
 Libertarianism,”
 in
 Ethics
 
and
 the
 History
 of
 Philosophy,
 London:
 Routledge
 &
 Kegan
 Paul,
 pp.
 195-­‐217.
 

 
Carnap,
 Rudolf
 (1955).
 “Meaning
 and
 Synonymy
 in
 Natural
 Language,”
 2
nd

 edition
 
of
 Meaning
 and
 Necessity,
 Chicago.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (1956).
 “Empiricism,
 Semantics,
 and
 Ontology,”
 2
nd

 edition
 of
 Meaning
 and
 
Necessity,
 Chicago.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (1959).
 “The
 Elimination
 of
 Metaphysics
 Through
 the
 Analysis
 of
 Language,”
 in
 
Logical
 Positivism,
 Free
 Press.
 Ayer,
 A.J.
 (ed.)
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (1959).
 “The
 Old
 Logic
 and
 The
 New
 Logic,”
 in
 Logical
 Positivism,
 Free
 Press.
 
Ayer,
 A.J.
 (ed.)
 

 
Chalmers,
 David
 J.
 (unpublished).
 “Verbal
 Disputes
 and
 Philosophical
 Progress”.
 

 
Dorr,
 Ciann
 (2006).
 “What
 We
 Disagree
 About
 When
 We
 Disagree
 About
 
Ontology,”
 in
 Kalderson,
 Mark
 Eli
 (ed.),
 Fictionalist
 Approaches
 to
 Metaphysics,
 
OUP.
 

 
Eklund,
 Matti
 (2008).
 “The
 Picture
 of
 Reality
 as
 an
 Amorphous
 Lump,”
 in
 
Contemporary
 Debates
 in
 Metaphysics,
 Blackwell.
 Sider,
 T.,
 Hawthorne,
 J.
 
Zimmerman,
 D.
 (eds.).
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2009).
 
 “Carnap
 and
 Ontological
 Pluralism,”
 in
 Metametaphysics:
 New
 Essays
 
in
 the
 Foundations
 of
 Ontology,
 Oxford.
 Chalmers,
 D.,
 Manley,
 D.,
 Wasserman,
 R.
 
(eds.)
 

 
Frankfurt,
 H.
 (1971)
 “Freedom
 of
 the
 Will
 and
 the
 Concept
 of
 a
 Person,”
 Journal
 of
 
Philosophy
 68:5-­‐20.
 

 
Goodman,
 Nelson
 (1979).
 Fact
 Fiction
 and
 Forecast,
 Harvard.
 

 
Hirsch,
 Eli
 (2005).
 “Physical-­‐Object
 Ontology,
 Verbal
 Disputes,
 and
 Common
 
Sense”,
 in
 Philosophy
 and
 Phenomenological
 Research,
 Vol.
 LXX,
 No.
 1,
 January.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2008).
 “Ontological
 Arguments:
 Interpretive
 Charity
 and
 Quantifier
 Variance”
 
in
 Contemporary
 Debates
 in
 Metaphysics,
 Blackwell,
 Sider,
 T.,
 Hawthorne,
 J.
 
Zimmerman,
 D.
 (eds.).
 

  129
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2009).
 “Ontology
 and
 Alternative
 Languages
 in
 Metametaphysics:
 New
 Essays
 
on
 the
 Foundations
 of
 Ontology,
 Oxford.
 Chalmers,
 D.,
 Manley,
 D.,
 Wasserman,
 R.
 
(eds.).
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2011).
 Quantifier
 Variance
 and
 Realism,
 New
 York:
 Oxford
 University
 Press.
 

 
Jenkins,
 Carrie
 (unpublished).
 “Merely
 Verbal
 Disputes”.
 

 
Kane,
 R.
 (1996)
 The
 Significance
 of
 Free
 Will,
 New
 York:
 Oxford
 University
 Press.
 

 
Lewis,
 David
 (1983).
 “New
 Work
 for
 a
 Theory
 of
 Universals”,
 in
 Australasian
 
Journal
 of
 Philosophy
 Vol.
 61,
 No.
 4,
 December.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (1991).
 Parts
 of
 Classes,
 Cambridge:
 Blackwell.
 

 
Manley,
 David
 (2009).
 
 “Introduction:
 A
 Guided
 Tour
 of
 Metametaphysics”,
 in
 
 
Metametaphysics:
 New
 Essays
 on
 the
 Foundations
 of
 Ontology,
 Oxford.
 Chalmers,
 
D.,
 Manley,
 D.,
 Wasserman,
 R.
 (eds.).
 

 
Markosian,
 N.
 (2006)
 “A
 Defense
 of
 Presentism,”
 in
 D.
 Zimmerman
 (ed.)
 Oxford
 
Studies
 in
 Metaphysics,
 volume
 1,
 Oxford:
 Oxford
 University
 Press,
 pp.
 47-­‐82.
 

 
Marsh,
 Gerald
 H.
 (forthcoming),
 “Is
 the
 Hirsch-­‐Sider
 Dispute
 Merely
 Verbal?”,
 in
 
Australasian
 Journal
 of
 Philosophy.
 

 
O’Connor,
 T.
 (2000)
 Persons
 and
 Causes,
 New
 York:
 Oxford
 University
 Press.
 

 
Pereboom,
 D.
 (2001)
 Living
 Without
 Free
 Will,
 Cambridge:
 Cambridge
 University
 
Press.
 

 
Putnam,
 H.
 (1973.
 “Meaning
 and
 Reference,”
 Journal
 of
 Philosophy
 70,
 699-­‐711.
 

 
Quine,
 W.V.O.
 (1948),
 “On
 What
 There
 Is”,
 Review
 of
 Metaphysics,
 Harvard.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (1950)
 “Identity,
 Ostension,
 and
 Hypostasis,”
 Journal
 of
 Philosophy
 47:
 621-­‐
33.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (1951),
 “Two
 Dogmas
 of
 Empiricism,”
 Philosophical
 Review.
 

 
Sidelle,
 Alan
 (2008)
 “The
 Method
 of
 Verbal
 Dispute”,
 in
 Philosophical
 Topics
 on
 
Methods
 in
 Metaphysics.
 

 
Sider,
 Theodore
 (2001)
 Four
 Dimensionalism,
 Oxford:
 Oxford
 University
 Press.
 

 

  130
 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2004)
 “Replies
 to
 Gallois,
 Hirsch
 and
 Markosian”
 in
 Philosophy
 and
 
Phenomenological
 Research
 Vol.
 LXVIII,
 No.
 3,
 May.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2006)
 “Quantifiers
 and
 Temporal
 Ontology”
 in
 Mind
 Vol.
 115
 .
 457
 .
 January.
 

 
Soames,
 Scott
 (2003)
 Philosophical
 Analysis
 in
 the
 Twentieth
 Century,
 Vols.
 1
 and
 
2,
 Princeton.
 

 
-­‐-­‐-­‐
 (2008)
 “Ontology,
 Analyticity
 and
 Meaning:
 The
 Quine-­‐Carnap
 Dispute”
 in
 
Metametaphysics:
 New
 Essays
 in
 the
 Foundations
 of
 Ontology,
 Oxford.
 Chalmers,
 
D.,
 Manley,
 D.,
 Wasserman,
 R.
 (eds.)
 

 
Van
 Cleve,
 J.
 (1986)
 “Mereological
 Essentialism,
 Mereological
 Conjunctivism,
 and
 
Identity
 Through
 Time,”
 Midwest
 Studies
 in
 Philosophy
 11:
 141-­‐156.
 

 
Zimmerman,
 D.
 (1998)
 “Temporary
 Intrinsics
 and
 Presentism,”
 in
 P.
 van
 Inwagen
 
and
 D.
 Zimmerman
 (eds.),
 Metaphysics:
 The
 Big
 Questions,
 Oxford:
 Blackwell
 
Publishers,
 pp.
 206-­‐19. 
Abstract (if available)
Abstract The purpose of my dissertation is to explore the nature of merely verbal disputes in general and, more importantly, how they occur in philosophy. I will discuss the general idea of what it means for a dispute to be merely verbal. Intuitively, a dispute is merely verbal when the disputants use some term or terms in their dispute differently and the difference in usage is what accounts for the dispute. In such a case, we often feel comfortable saying that the disputants do not really disagree. They only seem to disagree. ❧ An easy illustrative example is one of two British and American children involved in a dispute over whether a football is round or not. The Brit says that footballs are round. The American says that they are not. But the Brit is talking about soccer and the American is talking about American football. They just do not realize that this is what is happening and, so, they take themselves to be engaged in a substantive dispute. It seems to some philosophers (as well as myself) that there are some philosophical disputes that are like this in a relevant way. However, characterizing what it is for a dispute to be merely verbal is more difficult than one might first assume. If some philosophical disputes are merely verbal, then they are not as easy to spot as the dispute about football described above. They are subtler, in some important way. Recently, some philosophers have attempted to come up with characterizations of merely verbal disputes that capture these less easy to identify merely verbal disputes. Part of this project involves a discussion of current attempts (by Hirsch, Manley, Chalmers, and others) in the literature to characterize merely verbal disputes. ❧ I then consider two fundamentally different sorts of philosophical disputes, ontological and non-­‐ontological. Ontological disputes (disputes about mereology, for instance) are commonly thought to be candidates for being merely verbal. Many philosophers are doubtful of their status as substantive disputes. Hirsch, in particular, argues for the conclusion that they are merely verbal. I consider arguments by Eklund and Balaguer against the Hirschian view. I disagree with Eklund and come to a more mixed conclusion with respect to Balaguer’s argument. ❧ Lastly, while focusing on non-­‐ontological disputes, I identify what I call I-­‐disputes and S-­‐disputes, focusing more heavily on the latter. I-­‐disputes involve disputes over judgments of cases. S-­‐disputes involve disputes over necessary or sufficient conditions for the proper application of some term. I conclude the project by arguing that S-­‐disputes are merely verbal. 
Linked assets
University of Southern California Dissertations and Theses
doctype icon
University of Southern California Dissertations and Theses 
Conceptually similar
The scope and significance of George Berkeley's language model
PDF
The scope and significance of George Berkeley's language model 
A deontological explanation of accessibilism
PDF
A deontological explanation of accessibilism 
How to use intuitions in philosophy
PDF
How to use intuitions in philosophy 
Molyneux's question answered!
PDF
Molyneux's question answered! 
Descartes's creation doctrine and modality
PDF
Descartes's creation doctrine and modality 
Theism and secular modality
PDF
Theism and secular modality 
Just imagining things: Hume's conception-based account of cognition
PDF
Just imagining things: Hume's conception-based account of cognition 
Minimal sensory modalities and spatial perception
PDF
Minimal sensory modalities and spatial perception 
Functional properties of the superficial cortical interneurons
PDF
Functional properties of the superficial cortical interneurons 
Thomas Reid on singular thought
PDF
Thomas Reid on singular thought 
The case for moral skepticism
PDF
The case for moral skepticism 
Constraining assertion: an account of context-sensitivity
PDF
Constraining assertion: an account of context-sensitivity 
Rationality and the primacy of the occurrent
PDF
Rationality and the primacy of the occurrent 
A perceptual model of evaluative knowledge
PDF
A perceptual model of evaluative knowledge 
Vagueness, legal content, and legal interpretation
PDF
Vagueness, legal content, and legal interpretation 
Cognitive boundaries for rational coherence requirements
PDF
Cognitive boundaries for rational coherence requirements 
Contrastive reasons
PDF
Contrastive reasons 
The constitution of action
PDF
The constitution of action 
Settling trade disputes under the shadow of WTO adjudication
PDF
Settling trade disputes under the shadow of WTO adjudication 
Trade and legalization in East Asia: government-business collaboration in trade dispute settlement
PDF
Trade and legalization in East Asia: government-business collaboration in trade dispute settlement 
Asset Metadata
Creator Yovetich, Luka (author) 
Core Title Merely verbal disputes in philosophy 
School College of Letters, Arts and Sciences 
Degree Doctor of Philosophy 
Degree Program Philosophy 
Publication Date 05/09/2013 
Defense Date 12/19/2012 
Publisher University of Southern California (original), University of Southern California. Libraries (digital) 
Tag meta-philosophy,OAI-PMH Harvest 
Format application/pdf (imt) 
Language English
Contributor Electronically uploaded by the author (provenance) 
Advisor Van Cleve, James (committee chair), Levin, Janet (committee member), Paterson, Scott (committee member) 
Creator Email luka.yovetich@gmail.com 
Permanent Link (DOI) https://doi.org/10.25549/usctheses-c3-253608
Unique identifier UC11292650 
Identifier etd-YovetichLu-1677.pdf (filename),usctheses-c3-253608 (legacy record id) 
Legacy Identifier etd-YovetichLu-1677.pdf 
Dmrecord 253608 
Document Type Dissertation 
Format application/pdf (imt) 
Rights Yovetich, Luka 
Type texts
Source University of Southern California (contributing entity), University of Southern California Dissertations and Theses (collection) 
Access Conditions The author retains rights to his/her dissertation, thesis or other graduate work according to U.S. copyright law.  Electronic access is being provided by the USC Libraries in agreement with the a... 
Repository Name University of Southern California Digital Library
Repository Location USC Digital Library, University of Southern California, University Park Campus MC 2810, 3434 South Grand Avenue, 2nd Floor, Los Angeles, California 90089-2810, USA
Tags
meta-philosophy